Corel Video Studio Pro X2 Instruction Manual UGEN

User Manual: corel VideoStudio Pro - X2 - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Corel VideoStudio Pro Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 721

DownloadCorel  Video Studio Pro - X2 Instruction Manual UGEN
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Welcome to C orel VideoStudio

Welcome to Corel
VideoStudio
Thank you for purchasing VideoStudio, the video editing software that allows even beginners to produce
professional-looking movies. VideoStudio provides you with a complete set of tools to capture videos,
edit them, and share your final production on a VCD, DVD, BD or the Web.
Note: The availability of features depends on the VideoStudio version you have.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 1

Welcome to C orel VideoStudio > How VideoStudio works

How VideoStudio works
VideoStudio follows a step-by-step paradigm that lets you easily capture, edit, and share your video.
VideoStudio also offers more than a hundred transition effects, professional titling capabilities and simple
soundtrack creation tools. Learn in seconds, create in minutes.
To make a movie production, you need to capture footage from a camcorder or another video source.
You can then trim the captured videos, arrange their order, apply transitions, add overlays, animated
titles, voiceover narration, and background music. These elements are organized on separate tracks.
Changes to one track do not affect other tracks.

A movie production is in the form of a VideoStudio project file (*.VSP), which contains information on
the path location of the clips and how the movie has been put together. After you have finished your
movie production, you can burn it to a VCD, DVD, BD or record the movie back to your camcorder.
You can also output your movie as a video file for playback on the computer, import it to mobile devices
or share it online.
VideoStudio uses the information in the video project file to combine all the elements in your movie into a
video file through a process called
rendering.
VideoStudio contains a sample finished project that lets you have a general overview of most of the
features that are available in the program. This sample project also lets you experiment and get a general
feel of how to use VideoStudio. Select
Sample Project from the VideoStudio program group on the Windows Start menu.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 2

Getting started

Getting started
Before you install VideoStudio, make sure that your system meets the minimum hardware and software
requirements to get optimal performance.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 3

Getting started > System requirements

System requirements
For general and Proxy HDV Editing
Intel® Pentium® 4 3.0 GHz, AMD Athlon® XP 3000+ or higher with Hyper-Threading technology
Microsoft® Windows® XP SP2 Home Edition/Professional, Windows® XP Media Center Edition,
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows® Vista
512 MB of RAM or higher (1 GB of RAM may be recommended depending on the video capture
device used)
1 GB of available hard disk space for program installation
Windows-compatible sound card (multi-channel sound card for surround sound support
recommended)
Windows-compatible DVD-ROM for installation
Non-Proxy HDV editing
Intel® Pentium® 4 3.0 GHz or higher with Hyper-Threading technology
Microsoft® Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 for HDV camcorder support recommended)
1 GB of RAM (2GB or more recommended)
16X PCI ExpressTM display adapter
Input/Output Device Support
1394 FireWire cards for use with DV/D8/HDV*/AVCHD* camcorders
Support for OHCI Compliant IEEE-1394 and 1394 Adaptec 8940/ 8945
Analog capture cards for analog camcorders (VFW & WDM support for XP and BDA support for
Vista)
Analog and Digital TV capture device (BDA support)
USB capture devices, PC cameras, and DVD/hard drive camcorders
Windows® compatible Blu-ray, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or CD-R/RW drive
Apple iPod with video*, iPod Touch, iPhone, Sony PSP*, WMV Pocket PC, WMV Smartphone,
Nokia Mobile phone, Microsoft Zune
* Pro version
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 4

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 5

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 6

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 7

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 8

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 9

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 10

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 11

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 12

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 13

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 14

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 15

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 16

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 17

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 18

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 19

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 20

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 21

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 22

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 23

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 24

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 25

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 26

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 27

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 28

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 29

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 30

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 31

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 32

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 33

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 34

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 35

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 36

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 37

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 38

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 39

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 40

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 41

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 42

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 43

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 44

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 45

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 46

Getting started > Setting up your computer > C onnecting optical drives

Setting up your computer
Before you can start making movie projects using your own video footage, you first need to capture
video from your video camera into your computer. Your computer needs to be equipped with the proper
capture card or interface port for connecting your video camera and for capturing video to your
computer. Since capturing and video editing require a lot of computer resources, your computer must
also be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth editing of your videos.

Installing a capture card
If your capture card is a PCI-based card, install the card on your computer by inserting it in an available
PCI slot on the computer's motherboard.

Note: The type of capture card or interface port that you will need to connect your video camera to your
computer depends on the type of video camera you have.

Connecting a video camera to the computer
Use an IEEE-1394 cable to connect your digital camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port. Before purchasing
one, check first the pin connectors used on your camcorder and your computer. Most DV and Digital 8
camcorders have 4-pin connectors, whereas desktop computers that come with IEEE-1394 ports or
installed with IEEE-1394 cards usually have 6-pin connectors. The IEEE-1394 cable that is required for
desktop computers is a 4-pin to 6-pin cable. Most laptop computers have 4-pin connectors which
require a 4-pin to 4-pin cable.

Page 47

Checking the hardware setup
After connecting your digital camcorder to the computer, check if the device is detected by your
Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on your computer, check also if the card is
detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:
1 Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in playback mode (usually
named VTR or
VCR). Check your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3 Make sure the following device names are listed in the
Device Manager.
Under Windows XP: 1394 Bus Controller  DV Camcorder (The brand name depends on
the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)

Page 48

4 If your digital camcorder has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in
VideoStudio's Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your camcorder is
displayed under the Source list in the Options Panel
.
Note: In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers, there are other drivers
available. Consult your camcorder's manual for suitable drivers.

Connecting a USB camera
To capture live video and still images from a USB camera, connect the camera to an available USB port
on your computer.
USB cameras may require installation of a device driver, depending on the Windows version you are
using. For information on how to install your USB camera, refer to its accompanying manual. AVCHD
camcorders also use USB connections to copy video files to your hard drive.
After properly installing your USB camera, check if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:
1 Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
2 In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera is listed in this folder.
3 If your USB camera has been detected properly, it will be listed as a source device in VideoStudio's
Options Panel. In VideoStudio, select the Capture Step and check if your USB camera is displayed
under the Source list in the Options Panel
.

Connecting a digital TV
To capture digital television broadcasts, you need to install a Digital TV capture card or a digital TV
adapter. Check the hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.

Connecting analog video sources
VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, and Hi8 camcorders and VCRs are examples of analog video sources. To
capture video from analog sources, you will need to install an analog capture card in your computer.
Conventional broadcast television is also an analog source. To capture TV footage, you need to have a
TV tuner card installed in your computer.
Note: TV capture cards provide S-Video/Composite inputs and a TV tuner, which can be used to
capture both video and TV footage.

Page 49

Connecting the video device to the analog capture card
To connect your video device to the analog capture card, use either an S-Video or RCA Composite
cable depending on your device's video output. If your video device has both types of output, use the
S-Video connection for higher video quality captures.

If you want to use the Composite output of your video device, connect the yellow plugs of the
Composite cable to the video output of your video device and the video input port of the analog capture
card.

Most higher-end analog capture cards do not have the S-Video / Composite input ports crowded on the
side of the cards. Instead, these cards come with an external breakout box that provides all the video
input ports at the front of the box. Video devices can be connected to the capture card more easily
through the breakout box.

Connecting a TV antenna to the tuner card

Page 50

A tuner card has a TV antenna input ju st like the regular television monitor. Plug your TV antenna to the
TV connector of the tuner card.

Note: When purchasing a tuner card, make sure you acquire one that provides the correct TV system
(NTSC or PAL) for your region.
Connecting the capture or tuner card to the sound card
Most capture and tuner cards only allow video capture. To preview the audio from your video device or
TV and to capture the audio into your computer, you need to connect the audio output of the capture or
tuner card to the sound card's Line In port. The required cables for connecting to the sound card are
different for each type of video source.

Page 51

Connecting optical drives
To burn or author your video projects onto a VCD, DVD or BD, you need to connect their respective
optical drive burners to enable you to output your projects to your desired formats. Check the
hardware's user guide to learn information on how to connect it to your computer.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 52

Getting started > Installing and running VideoStudio

Installing and running VideoStudio
The VideoStudio DVD has an auto-run feature that automatically starts up the installation.
Back up your projects and media files first before installing the new version of VideoStudio.

To install VideoStudio:
1 Insert the VideoStudio DVD into your DVD-ROM drive.
2 When the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions to install VideoStudio on your computer.
Note: If the Setup screen does not appear after loading the DVD, then you can manually start it by
double-clicking the My Computer icon on your desktop, then double-click the icon for the DVD-ROM
drive where the installation disc is inserted. When the DVD-ROM window opens, double-click the
Setup icon.
3 In addition to VideoStudio, these programs and drivers will be automatically installed:
· QuickTime
· SmartSound
· Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable Package
· DirectX

To run VideoStudio: Double-click the VideoStudio icon on your Windows desktop. Select the
VideoStudio icon from the VideoStudio program group on the Windows Start menu.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 53

Getting started > Preparation for video capturing and editing

Preparation for video capturing and editing
Capturing and video editing are tasks that require a lot of computer resources. Your computer must be
properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth video editing. Below are some tips on how to
prepare your digital camcorder and optimize your computer for capturing and editing. For better
workability of DV Quick Scan and camcorder device control, having the correct timecode on the DV
tape is a must. To do this, before shooting your video, use the standard playback (SP) mode and shoot a
blank video (for example, leaving the lens cover on while recording) without interruption from start to end
of a tape. It is recommended that you close all other applications when working with VideoStudio. You
should also turn off any automatically-launched software like screen savers to avoid possible interruptions
while capturing. If you have two hard drives in your system, it is recommended that you install
VideoStudio to your system drive (usually C:) and store captured videos in your other drive (usually D:).
The choice of what hard drive to use is also crucial. Using a dedicated video hard drive, preferably with
Ultra-DMA/66 7200 rpm and 30GB free space, is recommended. Make sure DMA is enabled for your
hard disk. Disable Write-Behind Caching on the hard drive used for video capture. Increase the Paging
File (Swap File) size to twice your amount of RAM.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 54

The VideoStudio Launcher

The VideoStudio Launcher
When you run VideoStudio, a startup screen appears which allows you to choose between the following
video editing modes:
VideoStudio Editor gives you the full editing
features of VideoStudio. It provides you total
control over the movie production process,
from adding clips, titles, effects, overlays, and
music to making the final movie on disc or other
medium.
Movie Wizard is ideal for users who are new to
video editing. It guides you through the movie
production process in three quick, easy steps.
DV-to-DVD Wizard allows you to capture
video, add a theme template to it, then burn it
onto a disc.
Tip: Select
16:9 to use widescreen for your project.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 55

The VideoStudio Launcher > DV-to-DVD Wizard > Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD

DV-to-DVD Wizard
Use the
DV-to-DVD Wizard to easily create a movie from the content of your DV tape then burn it onto a disc.

Step 1: Scan for scenes
Scan the DV tape and select the scenes you want to add to your movie.
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR/VCR)
mode.
2 Select a recording device under Device
.
3 Click the
Capture format arrow to select a file format for captured videos.
4 Specify whether to burn all videos of the tape (Burn whole tape) or scan your DV tape (
Scene detection).

To burn whole tape:
1 Select Burn whole tape and then specify the tape duration under
Duration.
2 Click
Next to apply template and burn onto DVD.

To use Scene detection:
1 After selecting Scene detection, choose whether to scan the tape from the Beginning or
Current position.
·
Beginning: Scans the tape for scenes from the beginning. VideoStudio will automatically rewind the tape if
the tape position is not in the beginning.
·
Current position: Scans the tape for scenes from the current tape position.
2 Specify the scan speed, then click
Start Scan to begin scanning the DV device for scenes. Scenes are video segments that are distinguished
by shooting date and time.

Page 56

3 In the Storyboard, choose the scenes you want to include in your movie. To do this, select a scene then
click
Mark Scene.

4 Click Next
to go to the next step.
Tip: Click
and select Save DV Quick Scan Digest to save scanned file and import without having to
scan again or
Save DV Quick Scan Digest as HTML to manage large number of tapes by printing this HTML file and
attaching it with your tapes.

Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD
1 Specify a Volume name and
Recording format for your movie.
Note: If you have more than one burner installed in your computer or the default drive is not a burner,
specify the burner you want to use in the
Advanced Settings dialog box.
2 Select a theme template from one of the available presets to apply to your movie then select its output
video quality.
3 To customize the theme template text, click
Edit Title.

Page 57

4 In the Begin tab of the
Edit Template Title dialog box, double-click the text to modify. You can also modify its attributes like
font, color or shadow settings.
5 Click the End tab to modify its text. Click
OK.
6 To mark your video clips with its date information, click Add as title in Video date information. Select
Entire video if you want it to appear from beginning to end. Or specify duration.
7 Click
to burn your movie file to a disc.
Tip: If you see at the bottom of the dialog box that the movie is too big to fit onto a DVD, click
Fit & Burn.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 58

The VideoStudio Launcher > DV-to-DVD Wizard > Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD

DV-to-DVD Wizard
Use the
DV-to-DVD Wizard to easily create a movie from the content of your DV tape then burn it onto a disc.

Step 1: Scan for scenes
Scan the DV tape and select the scenes you want to add to your movie.
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR/VCR)
mode.
2 Select a recording device under Device
.
3 Click the
Capture format arrow to select a file format for captured videos.
4 Specify whether to burn all videos of the tape (Burn whole tape) or scan your DV tape (
Scene detection).

To burn whole tape:
1 Select Burn whole tape and then specify the tape duration under
Duration.
2 Click
Next to apply template and burn onto DVD.

To use Scene detection:
1 After selecting Scene detection, choose whether to scan the tape from the Beginning or
Current position.
·
Beginning: Scans the tape for scenes from the beginning. VideoStudio will automatically rewind the tape if
the tape position is not in the beginning.
·
Current position: Scans the tape for scenes from the current tape position.
2 Specify the scan speed, then click
Start Scan to begin scanning the DV device for scenes. Scenes are video segments that are distinguished
by shooting date and time.

Page 59

3 In the Storyboard, choose the scenes you want to include in your movie. To do this, select a scene then
click
Mark Scene.

4 Click Next
to go to the next step.
Tip: Click
and select Save DV Quick Scan Digest to save scanned file and import without having to
scan again or
Save DV Quick Scan Digest as HTML to manage large number of tapes by printing this HTML file and
attaching it with your tapes.

Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD
1 Specify a Volume name and
Recording format for your movie.
Note: If you have more than one burner installed in your computer or the default drive is not a burner,
specify the burner you want to use in the
Advanced Settings dialog box.
2 Select a theme template from one of the available presets to apply to your movie then select its output
video quality.
3 To customize the theme template text, click
Edit Title.

Page 60

4 In the Begin tab of the
Edit Template Title dialog box, double-click the text to modify. You can also modify its attributes like
font, color or shadow settings.
5 Click the End tab to modify its text. Click
OK.
6 To mark your video clips with its date information, click Add as title in Video date information. Select
Entire video if you want it to appear from beginning to end. Or specify duration.
7 Click
to burn your movie file to a disc.
Tip: If you see at the bottom of the dialog box that the movie is too big to fit onto a DVD, click
Fit & Burn.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 61

The VideoStudio Launcher > DV-to-DVD Wizard > Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD

DV-to-DVD Wizard
Use the
DV-to-DVD Wizard to easily create a movie from the content of your DV tape then burn it onto a disc.

Step 1: Scan for scenes
Scan the DV tape and select the scenes you want to add to your movie.
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR/VCR)
mode.
2 Select a recording device under Device
.
3 Click the
Capture format arrow to select a file format for captured videos.
4 Specify whether to burn all videos of the tape (Burn whole tape) or scan your DV tape (
Scene detection).

To burn whole tape:
1 Select Burn whole tape and then specify the tape duration under
Duration.
2 Click
Next to apply template and burn onto DVD.

To use Scene detection:
1 After selecting Scene detection, choose whether to scan the tape from the Beginning or
Current position.
·
Beginning: Scans the tape for scenes from the beginning. VideoStudio will automatically rewind the tape if
the tape position is not in the beginning.
·
Current position: Scans the tape for scenes from the current tape position.
2 Specify the scan speed, then click
Start Scan to begin scanning the DV device for scenes. Scenes are video segments that are distinguished
by shooting date and time.

Page 62

3 In the Storyboard, choose the scenes you want to include in your movie. To do this, select a scene then
click
Mark Scene.

4 Click Next
to go to the next step.
Tip: Click
and select Save DV Quick Scan Digest to save scanned file and import without having to
scan again or
Save DV Quick Scan Digest as HTML to manage large number of tapes by printing this HTML file and
attaching it with your tapes.

Step 2: Apply a theme template and burn to DVD
1 Specify a Volume name and
Recording format for your movie.
Note: If you have more than one burner installed in your computer or the default drive is not a burner,
specify the burner you want to use in the
Advanced Settings dialog box.
2 Select a theme template from one of the available presets to apply to your movie then select its output
video quality.
3 To customize the theme template text, click
Edit Title.

Page 63

4 In the Begin tab of the
Edit Template Title dialog box, double-click the text to modify. You can also modify its attributes like
font, color or shadow settings.
5 Click the End tab to modify its text. Click
OK.
6 To mark your video clips with its date information, click Add as title in Video date information. Select
Entire video if you want it to appear from beginning to end. Or specify duration.
7 Click
to burn your movie file to a disc.
Tip: If you see at the bottom of the dialog box that the movie is too big to fit onto a DVD, click
Fit & Burn.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 64

The VideoStudio Launcher > Movie Wizard > Step 3: Finish

Movie Wizard
If you are new to video editing or you want to quickly make a movie, you can use the
VideoStudio Movie Wizard to assemble video clips and images, add background music and titles, then
output the final movie as a video file, burn it onto a disc, or further edit the movie in VideoStudio Editor.

Step 1: Add video and images
Assemble your video and images into a movie.

To add video and images:
1 Click one the following buttons to add video and images to your movie.
Click Capture to import video footage or images
into your computer.
Click Insert Video to add video files of different
formats such as AVI, MPEG, and WMV.
Click Insert Image to add still images. (You can
create a photo slideshow if you choose to only
add images.)
Click Insert Digital Media to add video from a
DVD-Video/DVD-VR formatted disc or from
your hard drive.
Click Import from Mobile Device to add video
from MS Windows-recognized devices.
Tip: Click Library to open the media library that contains media clips that come with VideoStudio. To
import your own video or image files to the Library, click
.
2 If you selected multiple clips, the
Change Clip Sequence dialog box will appear where you can arrange the order of the clips.
Drag the clips to the desired sequence then click
OK.
3 The video and image clips that you selected for your movie will be added to the
Media Clip List. Right-click a clip to open a menu with more options.

Page 65

Tip: You can also arrange clips in the
Media Clip List by dragging them to the desired sequence.
4 To preview the clips, select each clip in the Media Clip List and use the Jog Slider and Navigation
Panel buttons. When trimming a clip, drag the Mark-in and
Mark-out handles to select the desired start and end points of the clip.
You can also click
to recover lost DVB-T frames during DVB-T video capture.
Click to choose desired segments from a video file and extract them to the
Media Clip List.

Click
to automatically split video clips into smaller clips based on their shooting date and time.
You can also click
to sort clips in the
Media Clip List according to their name or date.

To capture video and images:
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR /
VCR) mode.
2 In VideoStudio Movie Wizard, click
Capture.
3 Check if your camcorder is selected in the
Source list.
4 Select the video file format to use for saving captured video files from the Format list. Specify the
Capture folder in which to save the files.
5 Choose
Split by Scene to separate scenes in your DV video clip into several clips based on frame content or

Page 66

shooting date and time.
Note: Click
Options to customize capture settings specific to your video device.
6 Play the videotape in your camcorder, and position the tape on the part of the video where to start
capturing.
Tip: If you are capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to play your videotape.
7 Click Capture Video to start capturing. Click Stop Capture or press
[Esc] to stop capturing.
8 To capture a still image from the video footage, pause the video on the desired image then click
Capture Image.
9 Click
Enable/Disable Audio Preview to play or stop DV audio preview while capturing.

Step 2: Select a template
Select a movie template to apply to your project. Each template provides a different theme which comes
with preset start and ending video clips, transitions, title and background music.
Notes:
· To save your project, click
then select Save.
· If you accessed VideoStudio Movie Wizard from within VideoStudio Editor, the above button will not
appear and you will have to save from the File Menu when you go back to the editor.

To apply a Theme template:
1 Select a theme template from the
Theme template list.
Home Movie templates allow you to create movies that include both video and images while
Slideshow templates are used exclusively for creating image slideshows.
2 To set the overall length of your movie, click
.
For Home Movie, specify the following options in the
Duration dialog box:
·
Fit to video duration: Keeps the
current movie duration.
·
Fit to background music: Adjusts
the movie duration to fit into the
length of the background music.
(The background music is added
to your movie in the second step
of the Movie Wizard.)
·
Specify duration: Lets you define
a custom duration for the whole
movie.
For Slideshow templates, specify Smart Pan & Zoom in the Settings dialog box.
Smart Pan & Zoom automatically focuses the pan and zoom motion to important parts of the image like
the face.

Page 67

·
Fit to image duration: Trims the background music to fit the total duration of the slideshow.
Tip: Select
Keep Previous to use the image duration you set in the previous page of the Movie Wizard.
· Fit to background
music tempo and duration: Adjusts the duration of each clip and the total duration of the slideshow to fit
the background music's tempo and duration.
Note: A prompt will be displayed if the images' total duration is longer than the music. Select Yes to
automatically drop images in excess of the music's duration or
No to select another background music. A longer music duration will result to the repetition of images to
fit the duration of the music.
·
Fit to background music tempo: Adjusts the duration of each clip to fit the background music's tempo.
3 For Home Movie templates, click
to open the Mark Clips dialog box. Select a clip then click Must
or
Optional to specify whether or not to include the clip in the show.

Note: Click
Auto to let the program decide which clips to retain or exclude.
4 To replace the title, first select the preset title from the
Title list. Double-click the preset text in the Preview Window and then type in your text.

Page 68

5 Click
to change text formatting.
In the
Text Properties dialog box, select a font type, size and color for the text, and set the desired shadow
color and transparency.
6 To replace the background music, click
to open the
Audio Options window. Locate and select the desired music file.
Click
to specify music file settings.
Note: Make sure that your background music is 30 seconds or longer if you want to fit the video to the
music. If the music duration is less than 30 seconds, the music will not be looped leaving the remaining
video without any background music.
7 Use the
Volume slider to adjust the volume of the background music with respect to the video's audio. Dragging
the slider to the left increases the volume of the background music and decreases the volume of the
video's audio.
8 Click
Next.
Note: If you opened the VideoStudio Movie Wizard within VideoStudio Editor, clicking
Next will skip the last step and directly insert the clips onto the Timeline in the VideoStudio Editor.

Step 3: Finish
Select how to output the final movie:
Click Create Video File to output your movie as
a video file that can be played back on the
computer.
Click Create Disc to burn your movie onto a
disc.
Click Edit in Corel VideoStudio Editor to make
further edits to your movie using VideoStudio
Editor.
_______________________

Page 69

Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 70

The VideoStudio Launcher > Movie Wizard > Step 3: Finish

Movie Wizard
If you are new to video editing or you want to quickly make a movie, you can use the
VideoStudio Movie Wizard to assemble video clips and images, add background music and titles, then
output the final movie as a video file, burn it onto a disc, or further edit the movie in VideoStudio Editor.

Step 1: Add video and images
Assemble your video and images into a movie.

To add video and images:
1 Click one the following buttons to add video and images to your movie.
Click Capture to import video footage or images
into your computer.
Click Insert Video to add video files of different
formats such as AVI, MPEG, and WMV.
Click Insert Image to add still images. (You can
create a photo slideshow if you choose to only
add images.)
Click Insert Digital Media to add video from a
DVD-Video/DVD-VR formatted disc or from
your hard drive.
Click Import from Mobile Device to add video
from MS Windows-recognized devices.
Tip: Click Library to open the media library that contains media clips that come with VideoStudio. To
import your own video or image files to the Library, click
.
2 If you selected multiple clips, the
Change Clip Sequence dialog box will appear where you can arrange the order of the clips.
Drag the clips to the desired sequence then click
OK.
3 The video and image clips that you selected for your movie will be added to the
Media Clip List. Right-click a clip to open a menu with more options.

Page 71

Tip: You can also arrange clips in the
Media Clip List by dragging them to the desired sequence.
4 To preview the clips, select each clip in the Media Clip List and use the Jog Slider and Navigation
Panel buttons. When trimming a clip, drag the Mark-in and
Mark-out handles to select the desired start and end points of the clip.
You can also click
to recover lost DVB-T frames during DVB-T video capture.
Click to choose desired segments from a video file and extract them to the
Media Clip List.

Click
to automatically split video clips into smaller clips based on their shooting date and time.
You can also click
to sort clips in the
Media Clip List according to their name or date.

To capture video and images:
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR /
VCR) mode.
2 In VideoStudio Movie Wizard, click
Capture.
3 Check if your camcorder is selected in the
Source list.
4 Select the video file format to use for saving captured video files from the Format list. Specify the
Capture folder in which to save the files.
5 Choose
Split by Scene to separate scenes in your DV video clip into several clips based on frame content or

Page 72

shooting date and time.
Note: Click
Options to customize capture settings specific to your video device.
6 Play the videotape in your camcorder, and position the tape on the part of the video where to start
capturing.
Tip: If you are capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to play your videotape.
7 Click Capture Video to start capturing. Click Stop Capture or press
[Esc] to stop capturing.
8 To capture a still image from the video footage, pause the video on the desired image then click
Capture Image.
9 Click
Enable/Disable Audio Preview to play or stop DV audio preview while capturing.

Step 2: Select a template
Select a movie template to apply to your project. Each template provides a different theme which comes
with preset start and ending video clips, transitions, title and background music.
Notes:
· To save your project, click
then select Save.
· If you accessed VideoStudio Movie Wizard from within VideoStudio Editor, the above button will not
appear and you will have to save from the File Menu when you go back to the editor.

To apply a Theme template:
1 Select a theme template from the
Theme template list.
Home Movie templates allow you to create movies that include both video and images while
Slideshow templates are used exclusively for creating image slideshows.
2 To set the overall length of your movie, click
.
For Home Movie, specify the following options in the
Duration dialog box:
·
Fit to video duration: Keeps the
current movie duration.
·
Fit to background music: Adjusts
the movie duration to fit into the
length of the background music.
(The background music is added
to your movie in the second step
of the Movie Wizard.)
·
Specify duration: Lets you define
a custom duration for the whole
movie.
For Slideshow templates, specify Smart Pan & Zoom in the Settings dialog box.
Smart Pan & Zoom automatically focuses the pan and zoom motion to important parts of the image like
the face.

Page 73

·
Fit to image duration: Trims the background music to fit the total duration of the slideshow.
Tip: Select
Keep Previous to use the image duration you set in the previous page of the Movie Wizard.
· Fit to background
music tempo and duration: Adjusts the duration of each clip and the total duration of the slideshow to fit
the background music's tempo and duration.
Note: A prompt will be displayed if the images' total duration is longer than the music. Select Yes to
automatically drop images in excess of the music's duration or
No to select another background music. A longer music duration will result to the repetition of images to
fit the duration of the music.
·
Fit to background music tempo: Adjusts the duration of each clip to fit the background music's tempo.
3 For Home Movie templates, click
to open the Mark Clips dialog box. Select a clip then click Must
or
Optional to specify whether or not to include the clip in the show.

Note: Click
Auto to let the program decide which clips to retain or exclude.
4 To replace the title, first select the preset title from the
Title list. Double-click the preset text in the Preview Window and then type in your text.

Page 74

5 Click
to change text formatting.
In the
Text Properties dialog box, select a font type, size and color for the text, and set the desired shadow
color and transparency.
6 To replace the background music, click
to open the
Audio Options window. Locate and select the desired music file.
Click
to specify music file settings.
Note: Make sure that your background music is 30 seconds or longer if you want to fit the video to the
music. If the music duration is less than 30 seconds, the music will not be looped leaving the remaining
video without any background music.
7 Use the
Volume slider to adjust the volume of the background music with respect to the video's audio. Dragging
the slider to the left increases the volume of the background music and decreases the volume of the
video's audio.
8 Click
Next.
Note: If you opened the VideoStudio Movie Wizard within VideoStudio Editor, clicking
Next will skip the last step and directly insert the clips onto the Timeline in the VideoStudio Editor.

Step 3: Finish
Select how to output the final movie:
Click Create Video File to output your movie as
a video file that can be played back on the
computer.
Click Create Disc to burn your movie onto a
disc.
Click Edit in Corel VideoStudio Editor to make
further edits to your movie using VideoStudio
Editor.
_______________________

Page 75

Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 76

The VideoStudio Launcher > Movie Wizard > Step 3: Finish

Movie Wizard
If you are new to video editing or you want to quickly make a movie, you can use the
VideoStudio Movie Wizard to assemble video clips and images, add background music and titles, then
output the final movie as a video file, burn it onto a disc, or further edit the movie in VideoStudio Editor.

Step 1: Add video and images
Assemble your video and images into a movie.

To add video and images:
1 Click one the following buttons to add video and images to your movie.
Click Capture to import video footage or images
into your computer.
Click Insert Video to add video files of different
formats such as AVI, MPEG, and WMV.
Click Insert Image to add still images. (You can
create a photo slideshow if you choose to only
add images.)
Click Insert Digital Media to add video from a
DVD-Video/DVD-VR formatted disc or from
your hard drive.
Click Import from Mobile Device to add video
from MS Windows-recognized devices.
Tip: Click Library to open the media library that contains media clips that come with VideoStudio. To
import your own video or image files to the Library, click
.
2 If you selected multiple clips, the
Change Clip Sequence dialog box will appear where you can arrange the order of the clips.
Drag the clips to the desired sequence then click
OK.
3 The video and image clips that you selected for your movie will be added to the
Media Clip List. Right-click a clip to open a menu with more options.

Page 77

Tip: You can also arrange clips in the
Media Clip List by dragging them to the desired sequence.
4 To preview the clips, select each clip in the Media Clip List and use the Jog Slider and Navigation
Panel buttons. When trimming a clip, drag the Mark-in and
Mark-out handles to select the desired start and end points of the clip.
You can also click
to recover lost DVB-T frames during DVB-T video capture.
Click to choose desired segments from a video file and extract them to the
Media Clip List.

Click
to automatically split video clips into smaller clips based on their shooting date and time.
You can also click
to sort clips in the
Media Clip List according to their name or date.

To capture video and images:
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR /
VCR) mode.
2 In VideoStudio Movie Wizard, click
Capture.
3 Check if your camcorder is selected in the
Source list.
4 Select the video file format to use for saving captured video files from the Format list. Specify the
Capture folder in which to save the files.
5 Choose
Split by Scene to separate scenes in your DV video clip into several clips based on frame content or

Page 78

shooting date and time.
Note: Click
Options to customize capture settings specific to your video device.
6 Play the videotape in your camcorder, and position the tape on the part of the video where to start
capturing.
Tip: If you are capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to play your videotape.
7 Click Capture Video to start capturing. Click Stop Capture or press
[Esc] to stop capturing.
8 To capture a still image from the video footage, pause the video on the desired image then click
Capture Image.
9 Click
Enable/Disable Audio Preview to play or stop DV audio preview while capturing.

Step 2: Select a template
Select a movie template to apply to your project. Each template provides a different theme which comes
with preset start and ending video clips, transitions, title and background music.
Notes:
· To save your project, click
then select Save.
· If you accessed VideoStudio Movie Wizard from within VideoStudio Editor, the above button will not
appear and you will have to save from the File Menu when you go back to the editor.

To apply a Theme template:
1 Select a theme template from the
Theme template list.
Home Movie templates allow you to create movies that include both video and images while
Slideshow templates are used exclusively for creating image slideshows.
2 To set the overall length of your movie, click
.
For Home Movie, specify the following options in the
Duration dialog box:
·
Fit to video duration: Keeps the
current movie duration.
·
Fit to background music: Adjusts
the movie duration to fit into the
length of the background music.
(The background music is added
to your movie in the second step
of the Movie Wizard.)
·
Specify duration: Lets you define
a custom duration for the whole
movie.
For Slideshow templates, specify Smart Pan & Zoom in the Settings dialog box.
Smart Pan & Zoom automatically focuses the pan and zoom motion to important parts of the image like
the face.

Page 79

·
Fit to image duration: Trims the background music to fit the total duration of the slideshow.
Tip: Select
Keep Previous to use the image duration you set in the previous page of the Movie Wizard.
· Fit to background
music tempo and duration: Adjusts the duration of each clip and the total duration of the slideshow to fit
the background music's tempo and duration.
Note: A prompt will be displayed if the images' total duration is longer than the music. Select Yes to
automatically drop images in excess of the music's duration or
No to select another background music. A longer music duration will result to the repetition of images to
fit the duration of the music.
·
Fit to background music tempo: Adjusts the duration of each clip to fit the background music's tempo.
3 For Home Movie templates, click
to open the Mark Clips dialog box. Select a clip then click Must
or
Optional to specify whether or not to include the clip in the show.

Note: Click
Auto to let the program decide which clips to retain or exclude.
4 To replace the title, first select the preset title from the
Title list. Double-click the preset text in the Preview Window and then type in your text.

Page 80

5 Click
to change text formatting.
In the
Text Properties dialog box, select a font type, size and color for the text, and set the desired shadow
color and transparency.
6 To replace the background music, click
to open the
Audio Options window. Locate and select the desired music file.
Click
to specify music file settings.
Note: Make sure that your background music is 30 seconds or longer if you want to fit the video to the
music. If the music duration is less than 30 seconds, the music will not be looped leaving the remaining
video without any background music.
7 Use the
Volume slider to adjust the volume of the background music with respect to the video's audio. Dragging
the slider to the left increases the volume of the background music and decreases the volume of the
video's audio.
8 Click
Next.
Note: If you opened the VideoStudio Movie Wizard within VideoStudio Editor, clicking
Next will skip the last step and directly insert the clips onto the Timeline in the VideoStudio Editor.

Step 3: Finish
Select how to output the final movie:
Click Create Video File to output your movie as
a video file that can be played back on the
computer.
Click Create Disc to burn your movie onto a
disc.
Click Edit in Corel VideoStudio Editor to make
further edits to your movie using VideoStudio
Editor.
_______________________

Page 81

Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 82

The VideoStudio Launcher > Movie Wizard > Step 3: Finish

Movie Wizard
If you are new to video editing or you want to quickly make a movie, you can use the
VideoStudio Movie Wizard to assemble video clips and images, add background music and titles, then
output the final movie as a video file, burn it onto a disc, or further edit the movie in VideoStudio Editor.

Step 1: Add video and images
Assemble your video and images into a movie.

To add video and images:
1 Click one the following buttons to add video and images to your movie.
Click Capture to import video footage or images
into your computer.
Click Insert Video to add video files of different
formats such as AVI, MPEG, and WMV.
Click Insert Image to add still images. (You can
create a photo slideshow if you choose to only
add images.)
Click Insert Digital Media to add video from a
DVD-Video/DVD-VR formatted disc or from
your hard drive.
Click Import from Mobile Device to add video
from MS Windows-recognized devices.
Tip: Click Library to open the media library that contains media clips that come with VideoStudio. To
import your own video or image files to the Library, click
.
2 If you selected multiple clips, the
Change Clip Sequence dialog box will appear where you can arrange the order of the clips.
Drag the clips to the desired sequence then click
OK.
3 The video and image clips that you selected for your movie will be added to the
Media Clip List. Right-click a clip to open a menu with more options.

Page 83

Tip: You can also arrange clips in the
Media Clip List by dragging them to the desired sequence.
4 To preview the clips, select each clip in the Media Clip List and use the Jog Slider and Navigation
Panel buttons. When trimming a clip, drag the Mark-in and
Mark-out handles to select the desired start and end points of the clip.
You can also click
to recover lost DVB-T frames during DVB-T video capture.
Click to choose desired segments from a video file and extract them to the
Media Clip List.

Click
to automatically split video clips into smaller clips based on their shooting date and time.
You can also click
to sort clips in the
Media Clip List according to their name or date.

To capture video and images:
1 Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR /
VCR) mode.
2 In VideoStudio Movie Wizard, click
Capture.
3 Check if your camcorder is selected in the
Source list.
4 Select the video file format to use for saving captured video files from the Format list. Specify the
Capture folder in which to save the files.
5 Choose
Split by Scene to separate scenes in your DV video clip into several clips based on frame content or

Page 84

shooting date and time.
Note: Click
Options to customize capture settings specific to your video device.
6 Play the videotape in your camcorder, and position the tape on the part of the video where to start
capturing.
Tip: If you are capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to play your videotape.
7 Click Capture Video to start capturing. Click Stop Capture or press
[Esc] to stop capturing.
8 To capture a still image from the video footage, pause the video on the desired image then click
Capture Image.
9 Click
Enable/Disable Audio Preview to play or stop DV audio preview while capturing.

Step 2: Select a template
Select a movie template to apply to your project. Each template provides a different theme which comes
with preset start and ending video clips, transitions, title and background music.
Notes:
· To save your project, click
then select Save.
· If you accessed VideoStudio Movie Wizard from within VideoStudio Editor, the above button will not
appear and you will have to save from the File Menu when you go back to the editor.

To apply a Theme template:
1 Select a theme template from the
Theme template list.
Home Movie templates allow you to create movies that include both video and images while
Slideshow templates are used exclusively for creating image slideshows.
2 To set the overall length of your movie, click
.
For Home Movie, specify the following options in the
Duration dialog box:
·
Fit to video duration: Keeps the
current movie duration.
·
Fit to background music: Adjusts
the movie duration to fit into the
length of the background music.
(The background music is added
to your movie in the second step
of the Movie Wizard.)
·
Specify duration: Lets you define
a custom duration for the whole
movie.
For Slideshow templates, specify Smart Pan & Zoom in the Settings dialog box.
Smart Pan & Zoom automatically focuses the pan and zoom motion to important parts of the image like
the face.

Page 85

·
Fit to image duration: Trims the background music to fit the total duration of the slideshow.
Tip: Select
Keep Previous to use the image duration you set in the previous page of the Movie Wizard.
· Fit to background
music tempo and duration: Adjusts the duration of each clip and the total duration of the slideshow to fit
the background music's tempo and duration.
Note: A prompt will be displayed if the images' total duration is longer than the music. Select Yes to
automatically drop images in excess of the music's duration or
No to select another background music. A longer music duration will result to the repetition of images to
fit the duration of the music.
·
Fit to background music tempo: Adjusts the duration of each clip to fit the background music's tempo.
3 For Home Movie templates, click
to open the Mark Clips dialog box. Select a clip then click Must
or
Optional to specify whether or not to include the clip in the show.

Note: Click
Auto to let the program decide which clips to retain or exclude.
4 To replace the title, first select the preset title from the
Title list. Double-click the preset text in the Preview Window and then type in your text.

Page 86

5 Click
to change text formatting.
In the
Text Properties dialog box, select a font type, size and color for the text, and set the desired shadow
color and transparency.
6 To replace the background music, click
to open the
Audio Options window. Locate and select the desired music file.
Click
to specify music file settings.
Note: Make sure that your background music is 30 seconds or longer if you want to fit the video to the
music. If the music duration is less than 30 seconds, the music will not be looped leaving the remaining
video without any background music.
7 Use the
Volume slider to adjust the volume of the background music with respect to the video's audio. Dragging
the slider to the left increases the volume of the background music and decreases the volume of the
video's audio.
8 Click
Next.
Note: If you opened the VideoStudio Movie Wizard within VideoStudio Editor, clicking
Next will skip the last step and directly insert the clips onto the Timeline in the VideoStudio Editor.

Step 3: Finish
Select how to output the final movie:
Click Create Video File to output your movie as
a video file that can be played back on the
computer.
Click Create Disc to burn your movie onto a
disc.
Click Edit in Corel VideoStudio Editor to make
further edits to your movie using VideoStudio
Editor.
_______________________

Page 87

Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 88

The VideoStudio Launcher > VideoStudio Editor > The user interface

VideoStudio Editor
VideoStudio Editor provides a step-by-step workflow that makes creating movies simple and easy.
This section introduces you to the VideoStudio Editor interface and briefly explains the steps involved in
creating a movie. Refer to the succeeding chapters for more in-depth information on each step.

The user interface

1 Step Panel
Contains buttons that correspond to the different steps in video editing.
2 Menu Bar
Contains menus that provide different set of commands.
3 Preview Window
Shows the current clip, video filter, effect, or title.
4 Navigation Panel
Provides buttons for playback and for precision trimming of clips. In the
Capture Step, this also acts as the device control for the DV or HDV camcorder.
5 Toolbar
Contains buttons for switching between three project views and other quick settings.
6 Project Timeline
Displays all the clips, titles, and effects included in your project.
7 Options Panel
Contains controls, buttons, and other information that you can use to customize the settings of the
selected clip. The contents of this panel change depending on the step you are in.
8 Library

Page 89

Stores and organizes all of your media clips.
Notes:
· To change the user interface layout, click
Preferences: UI Layout.
· You can scale the layout of the user interface. Splitters between the Preview, Library and Timeline
windows can be scaled. Drag the splitters and resize windows according to your editing preferences.

The Step Panel
VideoStudio simplifies the process of creating movies into seven simple steps. Click the buttons in the
Step Panel to switch between steps.
Once a project is opened in VideoStudio,
video can be recorded directly to your
computer's hard drive in the Capture Step.
Footage from a videotape can be captured
as a single file or automatically divided into
multiple files. This step allows you to
capture video and still images.
The Edit Step and the Timeline are the heart
of VideoStudio. This is where you arrange,
edit, and trim your video clips. Video filters
can also be applied to your video clips in
this step.
The Effect Step lets you add transitions
between video clips in your project. Choose
from the variety of transition effects in the
Library.
The Overlay Step allows you to
superimpose multiple clips over another to
create a picture-in-picture effect.
No movie would be complete without
opening titles, captions and closing credits.
In the Title Step, you can create animated
text titles or choose from various presets in
the Library.
Background music sets the mood of your
movie. The Audio Step lets you select and
record music files from one or several
CD-ROM drives attached to your
computer. You can also dub over your
video in this step.
When your movie is complete, you can
create a video file for sharing on the Web or
output the movie on tape, DVD, or CD in
the Share Step.

The Menu Bar
The
Menu Bar provides various commands for customizing VideoStudio, opening and saving movie projects,

Page 90

working with individual clips, and more.

The Navigation Panel
The Navigation Panel is used to preview and edit the clips used in your project. Use the Navigation
Controls to move around a selected clip or your project. Use the Trim Handles and Jog Slider
to edit your clips.
When capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, the Navigation Controls are used for device
control. Use these buttons to control your DV or HDV camcorder or any other DV device.

1 Play Mode
2 Play
Select whether you want to preview your project Plays, pauses or resumes the current project or a
or the selected clip only.
selected clip.
3 Home
Returns to the starting frame.

4 Previous
Moves to the previous frame.

5 Next
Moves to the next frame.

6 End
Moves to the end frame.

7 Repeat
Loops playback.

8 System Volume
Click and drag the slider to adjust the volume of
your computer's speakers.

9 Timecode
Allows you to directly jump to a part of your
project or selected clip by specifying the exact
timecode.

10 Trim Handles
Allows you to set a preview range in the project or
trim a clip.

11 Enlarge Preview Window
Click to increase the size of the Preview Window.
You can only preview, not edit, your clips when
the Preview Window is enlarged.

12 Cut Clip
Cuts the selected clip into two. Position the
Jog Slider to where you want the first clip to end
and the second one to start, then click this button.

13 Mark-in/out
Use these buttons to set a preview range in the
14 Jog Slider
project, or to mark the start and end points where Allows you to scrub through the project or clip.
to trim a clip.

The Toolbar
The toolbar allows you to easily access buttons for editing. You can change your project view or zoom
your project timeline by adjusting your Timeline ruler. Click Smart Proxy Manager to speed up editing of
your HD videos and other large source files. Or use the
Track Manager to add more overlay tracks.

1 Storyboard View

2 Timeline View

Page 91

Shows image thumbnails of your movie in the
Timeline.
3 Audio View
Shows the audio waveform view, allowing you to
visually adjust the volume levels of your video clips,
narration or background music.
5 Fit Project in Timeline Window
Zooms in or out to display all the project's clips on
the Timeline.
7 Undo
Lets you undo a previous function.
9 Enable/Disable Smart Proxy
Toggles between Enable and Disable Smart Proxy
and allows you to customize proxy settings when
creating working copies of your HD videos with
lower resolution.
11 Track Manager
Allows you to show/hide tracks.
13 Painting Creator
A new feature of VideoStudio that allows you to
create image and animation graphic overlays to
further enhance your project.

Allows you to perform frame-accurate editing of
your clips.
4 Zoom Controls
Allows you to change the timecode increments in
the Timeline ruler.
6 Insert Media Files
Displays a menu allowing you to place video, audio
or image clips directly on the project.
8 Redo
Allows you to redo an undone function.
10 Batch Convert
Converts multiple video files to one video format.
12 Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround
Enables you to create 5.1 Surround audio tracks.

The Project Timeline
The Project Timeline at the lower part of the VideoStudio Editor window is where you assemble your
movie project.
There are three types of views for displaying the Project Timeline: Storyboard, Timeline and Audio View.
Click the buttons at the left side of the toolbar to switch between different views.

Storyboard View
Storyboard View is the fastest and simplest way to add video clips to your movie. Each thumbnail in the
storyboard represents an event in your movie, an event being a video clip or a transition. Thumbnails
show at a glance the chronological order of events in your project. The duration of each clip is shown at
the bottom of each thumbnail.

You can drag and drop video clips to insert and arrange them. Transition effects can be inserted between
video clips. A selected video clip can be trimmed in the Preview Window.

Timeline View
Timeline View gives you the most comprehensive display of the elements in your movie project. It divides

Page 92

a project into separate tracks for video, overlay, title, voice and music.

1 Show All Visible Tracks
Click to display all tracks in your project.

2 Add/Remove Chapter/Cue Point
Click to set chapter or cue points in your movie.

3 Ripple Editing
Enable/Disable Ripple Editing. When enabled,
allows you to select which tracks to apply it to.

4 Track buttons
Click the buttons to switch between different
tracks.

5 Timeline scroll control
Enable/disable scrolling along the Timeline when
previewing a clip that extends beyond the current
view.

6 Project scroll controls
Use the left and right buttons or drag the Scroll Bar
to move around your project.

7 Selected range
This color bar represents the trimmed or selected
part of a clip or project.

8 Timeline ruler
Displays the project's timecode increments in
hours: minutes:seconds.frames, which helps you
determine clip and project length.

9 Video Track
Contains video/image/color clips and transitions.

10 Overlay Tracks
Contains overlay clips, which can be video, image
or color clips.

11 Title Track
Contains title clips.

12 Voice Track
Contains voiceover clips.

13 Music Track
Contains music clips from audio files.

To switch to different tracks: Click a Step button in the Step Panel that corresponds to the
track. Click the Track buttons. Double-click the desired track, or click a clip on the track.
Tips:
· The wheel mouse can be used to scroll through the Timeline.
· When the pointer is over the Zoom Controls or
Timeline ruler, you can use the wheel to zoom in and out of the Timeline.

Audio View
Audio View allows you to visually adjust the volume levels of video, voice and music clips.

Page 93

Clips that contain audio are displayed with a
Volume rubber band that you can click and drag to adjust their volume.

The Options Panel
The
Options Panel changes depending on the program's mode and the step or track you are working on. The
Options Panel may contain one or two tabs. The controls and options in each tab vary, depending on the
selected clip.

The Library
The
Library is a storage depot for everything you need to create a movie: video clips, video filters, audio
clips, still images, transition effects, music files, titles and color clips. These are collectively known as
media clips.
Tips:
· You can print images directly from the Library. Right-click the image to print then select
Print Image and select an image size.
· Right-click the image then select
Print Options to specify print alignment and borders.

To add media clips to the Library:
1 Click
Load media to open a dialog box for locating the media clip to insert in the Library.

2 Select the desired file. You can also import VideoStudio projects and media files from your hard drive
into the VideoStudio Library. This can be found in the Project Video and
Windows Media Library options in the Library drop-down menu.
Note:
In using Windows Vista OS, VideoStudio automatically synchronizes with Vista Media Library during
program startup. In this case, Library modification is not possible in VideoStudio and you need to modify
Library content in the Vista Media Library.
3 Click
Open when you are finished.
Notes:
· You can also drag and drop files from Windows Explorer straight to the Library.
· Right-click a clip in the Library to view the clip's properties as well as copy, delete, or Split by Scene.

Page 94

To delete media clips from the Library:
1 Select the clip to remove from the Library, then press [
Delete].
Or, right-click the clip in the Library and select
Delete.
2 When prompted, verify whether you want to delete the thumbnail from the Library.
Tips:
· Export your Library to avoid losing important library information and media clips.This action will create
a backup of the virtual media files information of your current library in the directory you will specify. You
can find this option on
Tools:Library Manager - Export Library and specify your target location.
· You can also import your exported Library to restore media files and other library information. Click
on
Tools:Library Manager - Import Library and find the directory you specified.
· To reset your Library to the default settings, select
Tools:Library Manager - Reset Library.
· Select the
Smart search option in the Relink dialog box and VideoStudio will try to automatically locate and relink
the files in your library.

Thumbnail Views
VideoStudio allows you to adjust the size of thumbnails to compensate for different monitor sizes and for
easier access to the different media in the Library.

To adjust thumbnail size:
Move the slider to the left or right to decrease and increase thumbnail size, depending on your desired
appearance. VideoStudio will keep the last thumbnail size you selected on your next session.

Library Organizer
The
Library Organizer organizes your custom Library folders. These folders help you store and manage all
kinds of media files.

To use the Library Organizer:

Page 95

1 Click
to launch the Library Organizer dialog box and select Library Organizer from the drop-down
list. You can also click on
Tools:Library Manager-Library Organizer.
2 Select a media type from the
Available custom folders list.
3 Click New to display the New Custom Folder dialog box and create a new folder. Specify a Library
Folder name and a Description. Click
OK.

Click
Edit to rename or modify the description of a selected custom folder.
Click Delete to remove a selected custom folder from the Library
.
4 Click
Close.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 96

The VideoStudio Launcher > VideoStudio Editor > The user interface

VideoStudio Editor
VideoStudio Editor provides a step-by-step workflow that makes creating movies simple and easy.
This section introduces you to the VideoStudio Editor interface and briefly explains the steps involved in
creating a movie. Refer to the succeeding chapters for more in-depth information on each step.

The user interface

1 Step Panel
Contains buttons that correspond to the different steps in video editing.
2 Menu Bar
Contains menus that provide different set of commands.
3 Preview Window
Shows the current clip, video filter, effect, or title.
4 Navigation Panel
Provides buttons for playback and for precision trimming of clips. In the
Capture Step, this also acts as the device control for the DV or HDV camcorder.
5 Toolbar
Contains buttons for switching between three project views and other quick settings.
6 Project Timeline
Displays all the clips, titles, and effects included in your project.
7 Options Panel
Contains controls, buttons, and other information that you can use to customize the settings of the
selected clip. The contents of this panel change depending on the step you are in.
8 Library

Page 97

Stores and organizes all of your media clips.
Notes:
· To change the user interface layout, click
Preferences: UI Layout.
· You can scale the layout of the user interface. Splitters between the Preview, Library and Timeline
windows can be scaled. Drag the splitters and resize windows according to your editing preferences.

The Step Panel
VideoStudio simplifies the process of creating movies into seven simple steps. Click the buttons in the
Step Panel to switch between steps.
Once a project is opened in VideoStudio,
video can be recorded directly to your
computer's hard drive in the Capture Step.
Footage from a videotape can be captured
as a single file or automatically divided into
multiple files. This step allows you to
capture video and still images.
The Edit Step and the Timeline are the heart
of VideoStudio. This is where you arrange,
edit, and trim your video clips. Video filters
can also be applied to your video clips in
this step.
The Effect Step lets you add transitions
between video clips in your project. Choose
from the variety of transition effects in the
Library.
The Overlay Step allows you to
superimpose multiple clips over another to
create a picture-in-picture effect.
No movie would be complete without
opening titles, captions and closing credits.
In the Title Step, you can create animated
text titles or choose from various presets in
the Library.
Background music sets the mood of your
movie. The Audio Step lets you select and
record music files from one or several
CD-ROM drives attached to your
computer. You can also dub over your
video in this step.
When your movie is complete, you can
create a video file for sharing on the Web or
output the movie on tape, DVD, or CD in
the Share Step.

The Menu Bar
The
Menu Bar provides various commands for customizing VideoStudio, opening and saving movie projects,

Page 98

working with individual clips, and more.

The Navigation Panel
The Navigation Panel is used to preview and edit the clips used in your project. Use the Navigation
Controls to move around a selected clip or your project. Use the Trim Handles and Jog Slider
to edit your clips.
When capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, the Navigation Controls are used for device
control. Use these buttons to control your DV or HDV camcorder or any other DV device.

1 Play Mode
2 Play
Select whether you want to preview your project Plays, pauses or resumes the current project or a
or the selected clip only.
selected clip.
3 Home
Returns to the starting frame.

4 Previous
Moves to the previous frame.

5 Next
Moves to the next frame.

6 End
Moves to the end frame.

7 Repeat
Loops playback.

8 System Volume
Click and drag the slider to adjust the volume of
your computer's speakers.

9 Timecode
Allows you to directly jump to a part of your
project or selected clip by specifying the exact
timecode.

10 Trim Handles
Allows you to set a preview range in the project or
trim a clip.

11 Enlarge Preview Window
Click to increase the size of the Preview Window.
You can only preview, not edit, your clips when
the Preview Window is enlarged.

12 Cut Clip
Cuts the selected clip into two. Position the
Jog Slider to where you want the first clip to end
and the second one to start, then click this button.

13 Mark-in/out
Use these buttons to set a preview range in the
14 Jog Slider
project, or to mark the start and end points where Allows you to scrub through the project or clip.
to trim a clip.

The Toolbar
The toolbar allows you to easily access buttons for editing. You can change your project view or zoom
your project timeline by adjusting your Timeline ruler. Click Smart Proxy Manager to speed up editing of
your HD videos and other large source files. Or use the
Track Manager to add more overlay tracks.

1 Storyboard View

2 Timeline View

Page 99

Shows image thumbnails of your movie in the
Timeline.
3 Audio View
Shows the audio waveform view, allowing you to
visually adjust the volume levels of your video clips,
narration or background music.
5 Fit Project in Timeline Window
Zooms in or out to display all the project's clips on
the Timeline.
7 Undo
Lets you undo a previous function.
9 Enable/Disable Smart Proxy
Toggles between Enable and Disable Smart Proxy
and allows you to customize proxy settings when
creating working copies of your HD videos with
lower resolution.
11 Track Manager
Allows you to show/hide tracks.
13 Painting Creator
A new feature of VideoStudio that allows you to
create image and animation graphic overlays to
further enhance your project.

Allows you to perform frame-accurate editing of
your clips.
4 Zoom Controls
Allows you to change the timecode increments in
the Timeline ruler.
6 Insert Media Files
Displays a menu allowing you to place video, audio
or image clips directly on the project.
8 Redo
Allows you to redo an undone function.
10 Batch Convert
Converts multiple video files to one video format.
12 Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround
Enables you to create 5.1 Surround audio tracks.

The Project Timeline
The Project Timeline at the lower part of the VideoStudio Editor window is where you assemble your
movie project.
There are three types of views for displaying the Project Timeline: Storyboard, Timeline and Audio View.
Click the buttons at the left side of the toolbar to switch between different views.

Storyboard View
Storyboard View is the fastest and simplest way to add video clips to your movie. Each thumbnail in the
storyboard represents an event in your movie, an event being a video clip or a transition. Thumbnails
show at a glance the chronological order of events in your project. The duration of each clip is shown at
the bottom of each thumbnail.

You can drag and drop video clips to insert and arrange them. Transition effects can be inserted between
video clips. A selected video clip can be trimmed in the Preview Window.

Timeline View
Timeline View gives you the most comprehensive display of the elements in your movie project. It divides

Page 100

a project into separate tracks for video, overlay, title, voice and music.

1 Show All Visible Tracks
Click to display all tracks in your project.

2 Add/Remove Chapter/Cue Point
Click to set chapter or cue points in your movie.

3 Ripple Editing
Enable/Disable Ripple Editing. When enabled,
allows you to select which tracks to apply it to.

4 Track buttons
Click the buttons to switch between different
tracks.

5 Timeline scroll control
Enable/disable scrolling along the Timeline when
previewing a clip that extends beyond the current
view.

6 Project scroll controls
Use the left and right buttons or drag the Scroll Bar
to move around your project.

7 Selected range
This color bar represents the trimmed or selected
part of a clip or project.

8 Timeline ruler
Displays the project's timecode increments in
hours: minutes:seconds.frames, which helps you
determine clip and project length.

9 Video Track
Contains video/image/color clips and transitions.

10 Overlay Tracks
Contains overlay clips, which can be video, image
or color clips.

11 Title Track
Contains title clips.

12 Voice Track
Contains voiceover clips.

13 Music Track
Contains music clips from audio files.

To switch to different tracks: Click a Step button in the Step Panel that corresponds to the
track. Click the Track buttons. Double-click the desired track, or click a clip on the track.
Tips:
· The wheel mouse can be used to scroll through the Timeline.
· When the pointer is over the Zoom Controls or
Timeline ruler, you can use the wheel to zoom in and out of the Timeline.

Audio View
Audio View allows you to visually adjust the volume levels of video, voice and music clips.

Page 101

Clips that contain audio are displayed with a
Volume rubber band that you can click and drag to adjust their volume.

The Options Panel
The
Options Panel changes depending on the program's mode and the step or track you are working on. The
Options Panel may contain one or two tabs. The controls and options in each tab vary, depending on the
selected clip.

The Library
The
Library is a storage depot for everything you need to create a movie: video clips, video filters, audio
clips, still images, transition effects, music files, titles and color clips. These are collectively known as
media clips.
Tips:
· You can print images directly from the Library. Right-click the image to print then select
Print Image and select an image size.
· Right-click the image then select
Print Options to specify print alignment and borders.

To add media clips to the Library:
1 Click
Load media to open a dialog box for locating the media clip to insert in the Library.

2 Select the desired file. You can also import VideoStudio projects and media files from your hard drive
into the VideoStudio Library. This can be found in the Project Video and
Windows Media Library options in the Library drop-down menu.
Note:
In using Windows Vista OS, VideoStudio automatically synchronizes with Vista Media Library during
program startup. In this case, Library modification is not possible in VideoStudio and you need to modify
Library content in the Vista Media Library.
3 Click
Open when you are finished.
Notes:
· You can also drag and drop files from Windows Explorer straight to the Library.
· Right-click a clip in the Library to view the clip's properties as well as copy, delete, or Split by Scene.

Page 102

To delete media clips from the Library:
1 Select the clip to remove from the Library, then press [
Delete].
Or, right-click the clip in the Library and select
Delete.
2 When prompted, verify whether you want to delete the thumbnail from the Library.
Tips:
· Export your Library to avoid losing important library information and media clips.This action will create
a backup of the virtual media files information of your current library in the directory you will specify. You
can find this option on
Tools:Library Manager - Export Library and specify your target location.
· You can also import your exported Library to restore media files and other library information. Click
on
Tools:Library Manager - Import Library and find the directory you specified.
· To reset your Library to the default settings, select
Tools:Library Manager - Reset Library.
· Select the
Smart search option in the Relink dialog box and VideoStudio will try to automatically locate and relink
the files in your library.

Thumbnail Views
VideoStudio allows you to adjust the size of thumbnails to compensate for different monitor sizes and for
easier access to the different media in the Library.

To adjust thumbnail size:
Move the slider to the left or right to decrease and increase thumbnail size, depending on your desired
appearance. VideoStudio will keep the last thumbnail size you selected on your next session.

Library Organizer
The
Library Organizer organizes your custom Library folders. These folders help you store and manage all
kinds of media files.

To use the Library Organizer:

Page 103

1 Click
to launch the Library Organizer dialog box and select Library Organizer from the drop-down
list. You can also click on
Tools:Library Manager-Library Organizer.
2 Select a media type from the
Available custom folders list.
3 Click New to display the New Custom Folder dialog box and create a new folder. Specify a Library
Folder name and a Description. Click
OK.

Click
Edit to rename or modify the description of a selected custom folder.
Click Delete to remove a selected custom folder from the Library
.
4 Click
Close.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 104

Starting a new movie project

Starting a new movie project
When you run VideoStudio, it automatically opens a new project and lets you start composing your
movie production. A new project always uses VideoStudio's default settings. To check what these
settings are, click
File: Project Properties.
Project settings determine how your movie project is rendered when you preview it. Rendering is the
process by which VideoStudio converts raw video, titles, sounds, and effects into a continuous stream of
data which can be played back in your computer. You can modify the project settings in the
Project Properties dialog box.
When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks the
properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not identical,
VideoStudio automatically adjusts the project settings to match the clip's properties. Changing the project
settings to conform with clip properties allows VideoStudio to perform the SmartRender function.

Tip: The above message box lets you change the project properties to be the same as the first video clip
inserted into the Timeline. To toggle between displaying and not displaying the message box, select or
clear Show message when inserting first video clip into the Timeline in the
Preferences dialog box.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 105

Starting a new movie project > Setting your preferences

Setting your preferences
Customize the program's working environment through the Preferences dialog box. You can specify a
working folder for saving files, set undo levels, choose preferred settings for program behavior, enable
Smart Proxy and more. To open the Preferences dialog box, select
File: Preferences [F6].
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 106

Starting a new movie project > Setting project properties

Setting project properties
Project Properties serve as your template for previewing your movie projects. The project settings in the
Project Properties dialog box determine the appearance and quality of a project when it is previewed
on-screen. To customize project settings, select
File: Project Properties.
When customizing project settings, it is recommended that you make the settings the same as the
attributes of the video footage that will be captured to avoid distorting the video images and have smooth
playback without jumping frames.
When you customize project properties to be the same as the desired output settings for your project (for
instance, setting project properties to DVD settings if you will output the project to a DVD disc), you can
have more accurate previews of your final movie.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 107

Starting a new movie project > Adding clips

Adding clips
There are three ways to add clips to your project: Capture video clips from a video source. The video
clips will be inserted onto the Video track. Drag clips from the Library onto the correct tracks. Click
to directly insert media files to the different tracks.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 108

Starting a new movie project > Previewing > Setting a preview range

Previewing
The Play button in the Navigation Panel serves two purposes: for playback of your entire project or a
selected clip. To play back, click Project or Clip, then click
Play.
While working on your project, you will want to preview your work frequently to see how your project is
progressing. VideoStudio offers you two preview options: Instant Playback and High Quality Playback.
Select File: Preferences - General, then choose the preview method that you prefer in
Playback method.
· Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
·
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this
mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
Note: When Perform non-square pixel rendering is selected in the Project Options dialog box (opened
from
Project Properties dialog box), Instant Playback performance may be affected if computer resources are
insufficient.
In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender technology which renders only the
changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates re-rendering the entire project.
SmartRender saves time when generating previews.

Setting a preview range
For faster previews, you may choose to play only a part of your project. The selected range of frames to
preview is referred to as the
preview range, and it is marked as a red bar in the Ruler Panel.

Page 109

To play the preview area only:
1 Use the Trim Handles or the
Mark-in/out buttons to select the preview range.
The Preview range mark-in and Preview range mark-out
timecodes will then be displayed in the Options Panel.
2 To preview the selected range, select what you want to preview (Project or Clip), then click Play. To
preview the entire clip, hold [Shift], then click
Play.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 110

Starting a new movie project > Previewing > Setting a preview range

Previewing
The Play button in the Navigation Panel serves two purposes: for playback of your entire project or a
selected clip. To play back, click Project or Clip, then click
Play.
While working on your project, you will want to preview your work frequently to see how your project is
progressing. VideoStudio offers you two preview options: Instant Playback and High Quality Playback.
Select File: Preferences - General, then choose the preview method that you prefer in
Playback method.
· Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
·
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this
mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
Note: When Perform non-square pixel rendering is selected in the Project Options dialog box (opened
from
Project Properties dialog box), Instant Playback performance may be affected if computer resources are
insufficient.
In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender technology which renders only the
changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates re-rendering the entire project.
SmartRender saves time when generating previews.

Setting a preview range
For faster previews, you may choose to play only a part of your project. The selected range of frames to
preview is referred to as the
preview range, and it is marked as a red bar in the Ruler Panel.

Page 111

To play the preview area only:
1 Use the Trim Handles or the
Mark-in/out buttons to select the preview range.
The Preview range mark-in and Preview range mark-out
timecodes will then be displayed in the Options Panel.
2 To preview the selected range, select what you want to preview (Project or Clip), then click Play. To
preview the entire clip, hold [Shift], then click
Play.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 112

Starting a new movie project > Undoing and redoing actions

Undoing and redoing actions
You can undo or redo the last set of actions that you performed while working on your movie by clicking
Undo [Ctrl+Z] or Redo [Ctrl+Y] in the toolbar. You can adjust the number of undo levels in the
Preferences dialog box.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 113

Starting a new movie project > Showing and hiding grid lines

Showing and hiding grid lines
You can use grid lines to guide you when repositioning or resizing images and videos or when adding
titles to your movie.
To show grid lines in the Edit and Overlay steps, select a clip on the Timeline then select the Attribute
tab. Select Distort clip then select Show grid lines. To show grid lines in the Title step, select Show grid
lines in the Edit tab.
Tip: Click
to adjust grid line settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 114

Starting a new movie project > Saving your project

Saving your project
While composing your movie project, select
File: Save [Ctrl + S] to frequently save your project and avoid accidental loss of your work. VideoStudio
project files are saved in *.vsp file format.
To automatically save your work, select File: Preferences - General then select
Automatically save project every: and specify the time interval between saves.
To open an existing project, select File: Open Project [Ctrl + O]. To create a new project again, select
File: New Project [Ctrl + N].
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 115

Starting a new movie project > Saving project as Smart Package

Saving project as Smart Package
Packaging a video project is useful if you want to back up your work or transfer your files for sharing or
for editing in a laptop or another computer.
To save projects as Smart Package, select File: Smart Package. Specify the Folder path, Project folder
name and Project file name. Click
OK when done.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 116

C apture

Capture
The bulk of video work involves working with raw footage. Transferring footage from a source device to
the computer involves a process called
capturing.
When capturing, video data is transferred from a source (usually a video camera) through a capture card
to the computer's hard drive.

VideoStudio lets you capture video from DV or HDV camcorders, mobile devices, analog sources,
VCRs and digital televisions.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 117

C apture > Seamless DV and MPEG capture

Seamless DV and MPEG capture
VideoStudio runs on Windows operating systems and is subject to limitations in file size when capturing
or rendering video. VideoStudio automatically performs
seamless capture, saving video into a new file every time the maximum allowable file size for a single
video file has been reached.
Seamless capture will be performed only when capturing DV Type-1 or DV Type-2 (from DV
camcorder), or when capturing MPEG video (from DV and HDV camcorder or analog capture device).
The maximum captured file size per video file is 4 GB in Windows operating systems that use the FAT
32 partition file system. Captured video data in excess of 4 GB are automatically saved to a new file. In
Windows XP which can use the NTFS file system, there is no limit in the captured file size.
Seamless capture is not available in VFW (Video For Windows) capture.
Note: VideoStudio automatically detects your file system and performs seamless capture only in a FAT
32 partition file system.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 118

C apture > The C apture Step Options Panel > Importing from mobile devices

The Capture Step Options Panel
The Capture Step Options Panel consists of four options: Capture Video, DV Quick Scan, Import
Digital Media and
Import from Mobile Device.

Capture Video
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of video sources except for the available capture
settings in the Capture Video Options Panel that can be selected for each type of source.

To capture video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 To specify a capture duration, enter the values in the
Duration box in the Options Panel.
3 Select your capture device from the
Source list.
4 Select a file format to use for saving your captured video from the
Format list.
5 Specify a
Capture folder in which to save video files.
6 Click
Options to open a menu for customizing more capture settings.
7 Scan your video to search the part to capture.
8 When your video for capture is already on cue, click Capture Video
to start capturing.
9 If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise, click Stop Capture or
press [Esc]
to stop capturing.
Notes:
· When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or
MOVIE), you can capture live video.
· The available settings in the
Video Properties dialog box vary, depending on the capture file format that you have chosen.
Capture Video Options Panel Duration: Sets the length of time for the capture. Source: Displays the
detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed in your computer. Format: Gives you a
list of options where you select a file format for saving your captured video. Capture folder: This feature
allows you to specify a folder where you want your captured files to be saved. Split by Scene:
Automatically separates captured video into several files based on changes in shooting date and time
when capturing video from a DV camcorder. Options: Displays a menu allowing you to modify your
capture settings. Capture Video: Transfers video from your source to your hard drive. Capture Image:
Captures the displayed video frame as an image. Disable/Enable Audio Preview: Disables audio preview

Page 119

on the computer while capturing DV.
Note: If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your computer
during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio while capturing.
Digital Video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the
Format list in the Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
Note: You can also use the DV Quick Scan
option to capture DV video.
DV AVI Type-1 and Type-2
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video Properties to open a menu. In
the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or
DV Type-2.
DV is a data stream that itself contains video and audio. In DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are
stored unmodified as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With
DV Type-2, the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the AVI file.
The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is stored in its exact
original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible with video software that is not specially
written to recognize and process Type-1 files.
Note: To preview audio on the computer while capturing DV, click
Enable Audio Preview in the
Options Panel. If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your
computer during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio.
Controlling the DV camcorder with the Navigation Panel
When capturing from a DV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to scan your footage and locate the scenes you want to capture.

High Definition Videos
You can import high definition video from your AVCHD DVD or Hard Disk Drive (HDD) camcorders.

To capture high definition videos:
1 Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394 cable.
2 Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV camcorder is
switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is on the LCD
screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link, press P-MENU at the
lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU> STANDARD SET> VCR HDV/DV and press
HDV.
3 Click Capture on the Step Panel. In the Options Panel, click
.
Digital TV or DVB-T video
Before capturing, have the DVB-T source connected via a compatible capture card installed on your

Page 120

computer first.

To capture DVB-T video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 In the Capture Step Options Panel, select Digital TV Source from the
Source list.
3 Click Options and select
Video Properties.
4 In Channel List, click
Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the channels first
before capturing.
5 Click
Capture Video.
6 Click
Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and auto-recover DVB-T video.
7 Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.

To recover captured DVB-T videos:
1 Click Tools in the Edit Step and select
Recover DVB-T Video.
2 In the
Recover DVB-T Video dialog box, click Add and browse for the videos to recover.
3 Click
Recover.
Analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the computer.
Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured video in the Options
Panel's
Format list.
Click Options then select
Capture Options to choose how you want footage to be captured.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from, click Options then select
Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings: In the
Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video and select the
Input source (Tuner, S-Video, or Composite). In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video
source to ensure good quality captures. In the Template tab, set the frame size and compression method
to use for saving the captured video.
TV footage
VideoStudio allows you to capture TV footage through a TV tuner. Capture a segment of your favorite
television show on regular TV or cable then save it in your hard drive in AVI or MPEG.

To capture TV footage:
1 Select your TV tuner device from the
Source drop-down list.
2 Click Options: Video Properties to open the
Video Properties dialog box. If needed, adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the

Page 121

Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable TV, scan available channels in your region, and
more.
3 In the
Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
Split by Scene
It often happens that a single DV tape contains several footage that were shot at different times.
VideoStudio saves you the hassle of having to capture the segments one by one then save them as
separate files. The Split by Scene
feature will do that job for you.

To use Split by Scene option in Capture Step:
1 Select the Split by Scene
option in the Options Panel.
2 Click
Capture Video. VideoStudio will automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and
time and capture them as separate files.

DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. To use DV Quick Scan, refer to the first step
in the
DV-to-DVD Wizard section.
In DV Quick Scan, you can add the date and time of your video. After scanning your DV tape, click
Next. This will then display the Capture to Timeline Settings dialog box. Select Insert to Timeline and
choose Add video date information as title. If you want the shooting date to appear in the entire duration
of the video, select
Entire video or only during a specified time.

Importing digital media
You can import DVD/DVD-VR, AVCHD or BDMV video from a disc or hard drive or AVCHD
*.m2ts and *.mts files from a disc or a hard disk into VideoStudio.

To import Digital Media:
1 Click the Capture Step then click Import Digital Media.
Select a Title dialog box opens.
2 Locate the DVD drive that contains the video files and click
Import.
Note: Click Import from Folder to search your hard drive for the video files. Browse for the DVD folder
and click

Page 122

OK.
3 In the Import dialog box, select which DVD tracks to import in
Label. Use the preview screen to view the selected tracks to import.

4 Click
Import to finish. All imported videos will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
Importing videos in AVCHD format
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition), a new high-definition format, efficiently compresses
videos using MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard and produces high quality videos.
You can import AVCHD *.m2ts and *.mts files stored in standard DVDs or hard drives and edit them in
VideoStudio. To import AVCHD videos, follow the steps in Import Digital Media section.

Importing from mobile devices
You can insert media files from your mobile devices like Nokia cellphones, Microsoft Zune, Windows
Mobile 5.0, iPod and PSP to your project.
Note: Make sure your device is properly connected and it can be recognized by VideoStudio.

To import videos from a mobile device:
1 In Capture Step Options Panel, click
Import from Mobile Device.
2 Click the device where you want to import files from in
Device.
3 Click the type of media file you want to add. Click
to display all your media files in the device.
4 Select the media file and click
OK.
Tip: Click
Settings to set where to browse for files and where to save imported and exported files.

To trim video clips before inserting into your project:
1 Select the clip you want to trim and click
to preview the clip.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you
want to set as the start of the clip. Click
.
3 Drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you want to set as the end of the clip.

Page 123

Click
.
4 Click
OK.

to watch your trimmed clip. When finished, click

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 124

C apture > The C apture Step Options Panel > Importing from mobile devices

The Capture Step Options Panel
The Capture Step Options Panel consists of four options: Capture Video, DV Quick Scan, Import
Digital Media and
Import from Mobile Device.

Capture Video
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of video sources except for the available capture
settings in the Capture Video Options Panel that can be selected for each type of source.

To capture video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 To specify a capture duration, enter the values in the
Duration box in the Options Panel.
3 Select your capture device from the
Source list.
4 Select a file format to use for saving your captured video from the
Format list.
5 Specify a
Capture folder in which to save video files.
6 Click
Options to open a menu for customizing more capture settings.
7 Scan your video to search the part to capture.
8 When your video for capture is already on cue, click Capture Video
to start capturing.
9 If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise, click Stop Capture or
press [Esc]
to stop capturing.
Notes:
· When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or
MOVIE), you can capture live video.
· The available settings in the
Video Properties dialog box vary, depending on the capture file format that you have chosen.
Capture Video Options Panel Duration: Sets the length of time for the capture. Source: Displays the
detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed in your computer. Format: Gives you a
list of options where you select a file format for saving your captured video. Capture folder: This feature
allows you to specify a folder where you want your captured files to be saved. Split by Scene:
Automatically separates captured video into several files based on changes in shooting date and time
when capturing video from a DV camcorder. Options: Displays a menu allowing you to modify your
capture settings. Capture Video: Transfers video from your source to your hard drive. Capture Image:
Captures the displayed video frame as an image. Disable/Enable Audio Preview: Disables audio preview

Page 125

on the computer while capturing DV.
Note: If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your computer
during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio while capturing.
Digital Video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the
Format list in the Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
Note: You can also use the DV Quick Scan
option to capture DV video.
DV AVI Type-1 and Type-2
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video Properties to open a menu. In
the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or
DV Type-2.
DV is a data stream that itself contains video and audio. In DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are
stored unmodified as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With
DV Type-2, the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the AVI file.
The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is stored in its exact
original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible with video software that is not specially
written to recognize and process Type-1 files.
Note: To preview audio on the computer while capturing DV, click
Enable Audio Preview in the
Options Panel. If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your
computer during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio.
Controlling the DV camcorder with the Navigation Panel
When capturing from a DV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to scan your footage and locate the scenes you want to capture.

High Definition Videos
You can import high definition video from your AVCHD DVD or Hard Disk Drive (HDD) camcorders.

To capture high definition videos:
1 Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394 cable.
2 Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV camcorder is
switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is on the LCD
screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link, press P-MENU at the
lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU> STANDARD SET> VCR HDV/DV and press
HDV.
3 Click Capture on the Step Panel. In the Options Panel, click
.
Digital TV or DVB-T video
Before capturing, have the DVB-T source connected via a compatible capture card installed on your

Page 126

computer first.

To capture DVB-T video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 In the Capture Step Options Panel, select Digital TV Source from the
Source list.
3 Click Options and select
Video Properties.
4 In Channel List, click
Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the channels first
before capturing.
5 Click
Capture Video.
6 Click
Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and auto-recover DVB-T video.
7 Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.

To recover captured DVB-T videos:
1 Click Tools in the Edit Step and select
Recover DVB-T Video.
2 In the
Recover DVB-T Video dialog box, click Add and browse for the videos to recover.
3 Click
Recover.
Analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the computer.
Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured video in the Options
Panel's
Format list.
Click Options then select
Capture Options to choose how you want footage to be captured.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from, click Options then select
Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings: In the
Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video and select the
Input source (Tuner, S-Video, or Composite). In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video
source to ensure good quality captures. In the Template tab, set the frame size and compression method
to use for saving the captured video.
TV footage
VideoStudio allows you to capture TV footage through a TV tuner. Capture a segment of your favorite
television show on regular TV or cable then save it in your hard drive in AVI or MPEG.

To capture TV footage:
1 Select your TV tuner device from the
Source drop-down list.
2 Click Options: Video Properties to open the
Video Properties dialog box. If needed, adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the

Page 127

Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable TV, scan available channels in your region, and
more.
3 In the
Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
Split by Scene
It often happens that a single DV tape contains several footage that were shot at different times.
VideoStudio saves you the hassle of having to capture the segments one by one then save them as
separate files. The Split by Scene
feature will do that job for you.

To use Split by Scene option in Capture Step:
1 Select the Split by Scene
option in the Options Panel.
2 Click
Capture Video. VideoStudio will automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and
time and capture them as separate files.

DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. To use DV Quick Scan, refer to the first step
in the
DV-to-DVD Wizard section.
In DV Quick Scan, you can add the date and time of your video. After scanning your DV tape, click
Next. This will then display the Capture to Timeline Settings dialog box. Select Insert to Timeline and
choose Add video date information as title. If you want the shooting date to appear in the entire duration
of the video, select
Entire video or only during a specified time.

Importing digital media
You can import DVD/DVD-VR, AVCHD or BDMV video from a disc or hard drive or AVCHD
*.m2ts and *.mts files from a disc or a hard disk into VideoStudio.

To import Digital Media:
1 Click the Capture Step then click Import Digital Media.
Select a Title dialog box opens.
2 Locate the DVD drive that contains the video files and click
Import.
Note: Click Import from Folder to search your hard drive for the video files. Browse for the DVD folder
and click

Page 128

OK.
3 In the Import dialog box, select which DVD tracks to import in
Label. Use the preview screen to view the selected tracks to import.

4 Click
Import to finish. All imported videos will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
Importing videos in AVCHD format
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition), a new high-definition format, efficiently compresses
videos using MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard and produces high quality videos.
You can import AVCHD *.m2ts and *.mts files stored in standard DVDs or hard drives and edit them in
VideoStudio. To import AVCHD videos, follow the steps in Import Digital Media section.

Importing from mobile devices
You can insert media files from your mobile devices like Nokia cellphones, Microsoft Zune, Windows
Mobile 5.0, iPod and PSP to your project.
Note: Make sure your device is properly connected and it can be recognized by VideoStudio.

To import videos from a mobile device:
1 In Capture Step Options Panel, click
Import from Mobile Device.
2 Click the device where you want to import files from in
Device.
3 Click the type of media file you want to add. Click
to display all your media files in the device.
4 Select the media file and click
OK.
Tip: Click
Settings to set where to browse for files and where to save imported and exported files.

To trim video clips before inserting into your project:
1 Select the clip you want to trim and click
to preview the clip.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you
want to set as the start of the clip. Click
.
3 Drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you want to set as the end of the clip.

Page 129

Click
.
4 Click
OK.

to watch your trimmed clip. When finished, click

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 130

C apture > The C apture Step Options Panel > Importing from mobile devices

The Capture Step Options Panel
The Capture Step Options Panel consists of four options: Capture Video, DV Quick Scan, Import
Digital Media and
Import from Mobile Device.

Capture Video
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of video sources except for the available capture
settings in the Capture Video Options Panel that can be selected for each type of source.

To capture video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 To specify a capture duration, enter the values in the
Duration box in the Options Panel.
3 Select your capture device from the
Source list.
4 Select a file format to use for saving your captured video from the
Format list.
5 Specify a
Capture folder in which to save video files.
6 Click
Options to open a menu for customizing more capture settings.
7 Scan your video to search the part to capture.
8 When your video for capture is already on cue, click Capture Video
to start capturing.
9 If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise, click Stop Capture or
press [Esc]
to stop capturing.
Notes:
· When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or
MOVIE), you can capture live video.
· The available settings in the
Video Properties dialog box vary, depending on the capture file format that you have chosen.
Capture Video Options Panel Duration: Sets the length of time for the capture. Source: Displays the
detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed in your computer. Format: Gives you a
list of options where you select a file format for saving your captured video. Capture folder: This feature
allows you to specify a folder where you want your captured files to be saved. Split by Scene:
Automatically separates captured video into several files based on changes in shooting date and time
when capturing video from a DV camcorder. Options: Displays a menu allowing you to modify your
capture settings. Capture Video: Transfers video from your source to your hard drive. Capture Image:
Captures the displayed video frame as an image. Disable/Enable Audio Preview: Disables audio preview

Page 131

on the computer while capturing DV.
Note: If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your computer
during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio while capturing.
Digital Video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the
Format list in the Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
Note: You can also use the DV Quick Scan
option to capture DV video.
DV AVI Type-1 and Type-2
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video Properties to open a menu. In
the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or
DV Type-2.
DV is a data stream that itself contains video and audio. In DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are
stored unmodified as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With
DV Type-2, the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the AVI file.
The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is stored in its exact
original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible with video software that is not specially
written to recognize and process Type-1 files.
Note: To preview audio on the computer while capturing DV, click
Enable Audio Preview in the
Options Panel. If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your
computer during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio.
Controlling the DV camcorder with the Navigation Panel
When capturing from a DV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to scan your footage and locate the scenes you want to capture.

High Definition Videos
You can import high definition video from your AVCHD DVD or Hard Disk Drive (HDD) camcorders.

To capture high definition videos:
1 Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394 cable.
2 Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV camcorder is
switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is on the LCD
screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link, press P-MENU at the
lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU> STANDARD SET> VCR HDV/DV and press
HDV.
3 Click Capture on the Step Panel. In the Options Panel, click
.
Digital TV or DVB-T video
Before capturing, have the DVB-T source connected via a compatible capture card installed on your

Page 132

computer first.

To capture DVB-T video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 In the Capture Step Options Panel, select Digital TV Source from the
Source list.
3 Click Options and select
Video Properties.
4 In Channel List, click
Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the channels first
before capturing.
5 Click
Capture Video.
6 Click
Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and auto-recover DVB-T video.
7 Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.

To recover captured DVB-T videos:
1 Click Tools in the Edit Step and select
Recover DVB-T Video.
2 In the
Recover DVB-T Video dialog box, click Add and browse for the videos to recover.
3 Click
Recover.
Analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the computer.
Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured video in the Options
Panel's
Format list.
Click Options then select
Capture Options to choose how you want footage to be captured.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from, click Options then select
Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings: In the
Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video and select the
Input source (Tuner, S-Video, or Composite). In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video
source to ensure good quality captures. In the Template tab, set the frame size and compression method
to use for saving the captured video.
TV footage
VideoStudio allows you to capture TV footage through a TV tuner. Capture a segment of your favorite
television show on regular TV or cable then save it in your hard drive in AVI or MPEG.

To capture TV footage:
1 Select your TV tuner device from the
Source drop-down list.
2 Click Options: Video Properties to open the
Video Properties dialog box. If needed, adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the

Page 133

Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable TV, scan available channels in your region, and
more.
3 In the
Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
Split by Scene
It often happens that a single DV tape contains several footage that were shot at different times.
VideoStudio saves you the hassle of having to capture the segments one by one then save them as
separate files. The Split by Scene
feature will do that job for you.

To use Split by Scene option in Capture Step:
1 Select the Split by Scene
option in the Options Panel.
2 Click
Capture Video. VideoStudio will automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and
time and capture them as separate files.

DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. To use DV Quick Scan, refer to the first step
in the
DV-to-DVD Wizard section.
In DV Quick Scan, you can add the date and time of your video. After scanning your DV tape, click
Next. This will then display the Capture to Timeline Settings dialog box. Select Insert to Timeline and
choose Add video date information as title. If you want the shooting date to appear in the entire duration
of the video, select
Entire video or only during a specified time.

Importing digital media
You can import DVD/DVD-VR, AVCHD or BDMV video from a disc or hard drive or AVCHD
*.m2ts and *.mts files from a disc or a hard disk into VideoStudio.

To import Digital Media:
1 Click the Capture Step then click Import Digital Media.
Select a Title dialog box opens.
2 Locate the DVD drive that contains the video files and click
Import.
Note: Click Import from Folder to search your hard drive for the video files. Browse for the DVD folder
and click

Page 134

OK.
3 In the Import dialog box, select which DVD tracks to import in
Label. Use the preview screen to view the selected tracks to import.

4 Click
Import to finish. All imported videos will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
Importing videos in AVCHD format
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition), a new high-definition format, efficiently compresses
videos using MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard and produces high quality videos.
You can import AVCHD *.m2ts and *.mts files stored in standard DVDs or hard drives and edit them in
VideoStudio. To import AVCHD videos, follow the steps in Import Digital Media section.

Importing from mobile devices
You can insert media files from your mobile devices like Nokia cellphones, Microsoft Zune, Windows
Mobile 5.0, iPod and PSP to your project.
Note: Make sure your device is properly connected and it can be recognized by VideoStudio.

To import videos from a mobile device:
1 In Capture Step Options Panel, click
Import from Mobile Device.
2 Click the device where you want to import files from in
Device.
3 Click the type of media file you want to add. Click
to display all your media files in the device.
4 Select the media file and click
OK.
Tip: Click
Settings to set where to browse for files and where to save imported and exported files.

To trim video clips before inserting into your project:
1 Select the clip you want to trim and click
to preview the clip.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you
want to set as the start of the clip. Click
.
3 Drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you want to set as the end of the clip.

Page 135

Click
.
4 Click
OK.

to watch your trimmed clip. When finished, click

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 136

C apture > The C apture Step Options Panel > Importing from mobile devices

The Capture Step Options Panel
The Capture Step Options Panel consists of four options: Capture Video, DV Quick Scan, Import
Digital Media and
Import from Mobile Device.

Capture Video
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of video sources except for the available capture
settings in the Capture Video Options Panel that can be selected for each type of source.

To capture video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 To specify a capture duration, enter the values in the
Duration box in the Options Panel.
3 Select your capture device from the
Source list.
4 Select a file format to use for saving your captured video from the
Format list.
5 Specify a
Capture folder in which to save video files.
6 Click
Options to open a menu for customizing more capture settings.
7 Scan your video to search the part to capture.
8 When your video for capture is already on cue, click Capture Video
to start capturing.
9 If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise, click Stop Capture or
press [Esc]
to stop capturing.
Notes:
· When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or
MOVIE), you can capture live video.
· The available settings in the
Video Properties dialog box vary, depending on the capture file format that you have chosen.
Capture Video Options Panel Duration: Sets the length of time for the capture. Source: Displays the
detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed in your computer. Format: Gives you a
list of options where you select a file format for saving your captured video. Capture folder: This feature
allows you to specify a folder where you want your captured files to be saved. Split by Scene:
Automatically separates captured video into several files based on changes in shooting date and time
when capturing video from a DV camcorder. Options: Displays a menu allowing you to modify your
capture settings. Capture Video: Transfers video from your source to your hard drive. Capture Image:
Captures the displayed video frame as an image. Disable/Enable Audio Preview: Disables audio preview

Page 137

on the computer while capturing DV.
Note: If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your computer
during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio while capturing.
Digital Video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the
Format list in the Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
Note: You can also use the DV Quick Scan
option to capture DV video.
DV AVI Type-1 and Type-2
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video Properties to open a menu. In
the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or
DV Type-2.
DV is a data stream that itself contains video and audio. In DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are
stored unmodified as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With
DV Type-2, the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the AVI file.
The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is stored in its exact
original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible with video software that is not specially
written to recognize and process Type-1 files.
Note: To preview audio on the computer while capturing DV, click
Enable Audio Preview in the
Options Panel. If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your
computer during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio.
Controlling the DV camcorder with the Navigation Panel
When capturing from a DV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to scan your footage and locate the scenes you want to capture.

High Definition Videos
You can import high definition video from your AVCHD DVD or Hard Disk Drive (HDD) camcorders.

To capture high definition videos:
1 Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394 cable.
2 Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV camcorder is
switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is on the LCD
screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link, press P-MENU at the
lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU> STANDARD SET> VCR HDV/DV and press
HDV.
3 Click Capture on the Step Panel. In the Options Panel, click
.
Digital TV or DVB-T video
Before capturing, have the DVB-T source connected via a compatible capture card installed on your

Page 138

computer first.

To capture DVB-T video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 In the Capture Step Options Panel, select Digital TV Source from the
Source list.
3 Click Options and select
Video Properties.
4 In Channel List, click
Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the channels first
before capturing.
5 Click
Capture Video.
6 Click
Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and auto-recover DVB-T video.
7 Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.

To recover captured DVB-T videos:
1 Click Tools in the Edit Step and select
Recover DVB-T Video.
2 In the
Recover DVB-T Video dialog box, click Add and browse for the videos to recover.
3 Click
Recover.
Analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the computer.
Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured video in the Options
Panel's
Format list.
Click Options then select
Capture Options to choose how you want footage to be captured.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from, click Options then select
Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings: In the
Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video and select the
Input source (Tuner, S-Video, or Composite). In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video
source to ensure good quality captures. In the Template tab, set the frame size and compression method
to use for saving the captured video.
TV footage
VideoStudio allows you to capture TV footage through a TV tuner. Capture a segment of your favorite
television show on regular TV or cable then save it in your hard drive in AVI or MPEG.

To capture TV footage:
1 Select your TV tuner device from the
Source drop-down list.
2 Click Options: Video Properties to open the
Video Properties dialog box. If needed, adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the

Page 139

Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable TV, scan available channels in your region, and
more.
3 In the
Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
Split by Scene
It often happens that a single DV tape contains several footage that were shot at different times.
VideoStudio saves you the hassle of having to capture the segments one by one then save them as
separate files. The Split by Scene
feature will do that job for you.

To use Split by Scene option in Capture Step:
1 Select the Split by Scene
option in the Options Panel.
2 Click
Capture Video. VideoStudio will automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and
time and capture them as separate files.

DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. To use DV Quick Scan, refer to the first step
in the
DV-to-DVD Wizard section.
In DV Quick Scan, you can add the date and time of your video. After scanning your DV tape, click
Next. This will then display the Capture to Timeline Settings dialog box. Select Insert to Timeline and
choose Add video date information as title. If you want the shooting date to appear in the entire duration
of the video, select
Entire video or only during a specified time.

Importing digital media
You can import DVD/DVD-VR, AVCHD or BDMV video from a disc or hard drive or AVCHD
*.m2ts and *.mts files from a disc or a hard disk into VideoStudio.

To import Digital Media:
1 Click the Capture Step then click Import Digital Media.
Select a Title dialog box opens.
2 Locate the DVD drive that contains the video files and click
Import.
Note: Click Import from Folder to search your hard drive for the video files. Browse for the DVD folder
and click

Page 140

OK.
3 In the Import dialog box, select which DVD tracks to import in
Label. Use the preview screen to view the selected tracks to import.

4 Click
Import to finish. All imported videos will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
Importing videos in AVCHD format
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition), a new high-definition format, efficiently compresses
videos using MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard and produces high quality videos.
You can import AVCHD *.m2ts and *.mts files stored in standard DVDs or hard drives and edit them in
VideoStudio. To import AVCHD videos, follow the steps in Import Digital Media section.

Importing from mobile devices
You can insert media files from your mobile devices like Nokia cellphones, Microsoft Zune, Windows
Mobile 5.0, iPod and PSP to your project.
Note: Make sure your device is properly connected and it can be recognized by VideoStudio.

To import videos from a mobile device:
1 In Capture Step Options Panel, click
Import from Mobile Device.
2 Click the device where you want to import files from in
Device.
3 Click the type of media file you want to add. Click
to display all your media files in the device.
4 Select the media file and click
OK.
Tip: Click
Settings to set where to browse for files and where to save imported and exported files.

To trim video clips before inserting into your project:
1 Select the clip you want to trim and click
to preview the clip.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you
want to set as the start of the clip. Click
.
3 Drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you want to set as the end of the clip.

Page 141

Click
.
4 Click
OK.

to watch your trimmed clip. When finished, click

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 142

C apture > The C apture Step Options Panel > Importing from mobile devices

The Capture Step Options Panel
The Capture Step Options Panel consists of four options: Capture Video, DV Quick Scan, Import
Digital Media and
Import from Mobile Device.

Capture Video
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of video sources except for the available capture
settings in the Capture Video Options Panel that can be selected for each type of source.

To capture video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 To specify a capture duration, enter the values in the
Duration box in the Options Panel.
3 Select your capture device from the
Source list.
4 Select a file format to use for saving your captured video from the
Format list.
5 Specify a
Capture folder in which to save video files.
6 Click
Options to open a menu for customizing more capture settings.
7 Scan your video to search the part to capture.
8 When your video for capture is already on cue, click Capture Video
to start capturing.
9 If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise, click Stop Capture or
press [Esc]
to stop capturing.
Notes:
· When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or
MOVIE), you can capture live video.
· The available settings in the
Video Properties dialog box vary, depending on the capture file format that you have chosen.
Capture Video Options Panel Duration: Sets the length of time for the capture. Source: Displays the
detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed in your computer. Format: Gives you a
list of options where you select a file format for saving your captured video. Capture folder: This feature
allows you to specify a folder where you want your captured files to be saved. Split by Scene:
Automatically separates captured video into several files based on changes in shooting date and time
when capturing video from a DV camcorder. Options: Displays a menu allowing you to modify your
capture settings. Capture Video: Transfers video from your source to your hard drive. Capture Image:
Captures the displayed video frame as an image. Disable/Enable Audio Preview: Disables audio preview

Page 143

on the computer while capturing DV.
Note: If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your computer
during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio while capturing.
Digital Video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the
Format list in the Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
Note: You can also use the DV Quick Scan
option to capture DV video.
DV AVI Type-1 and Type-2
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video Properties to open a menu. In
the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or
DV Type-2.
DV is a data stream that itself contains video and audio. In DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are
stored unmodified as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With
DV Type-2, the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the AVI file.
The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is stored in its exact
original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible with video software that is not specially
written to recognize and process Type-1 files.
Note: To preview audio on the computer while capturing DV, click
Enable Audio Preview in the
Options Panel. If the audio sounds choppy, there may be a problem with previewing audio on your
computer during DV capture. This does not affect the audio capture quality. If this happens, click
Disable Audio Preview to mute the audio.
Controlling the DV camcorder with the Navigation Panel
When capturing from a DV camcorder, use the
Navigation Panel to scan your footage and locate the scenes you want to capture.

High Definition Videos
You can import high definition video from your AVCHD DVD or Hard Disk Drive (HDD) camcorders.

To capture high definition videos:
1 Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394 cable.
2 Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV camcorder is
switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is on the LCD
screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link, press P-MENU at the
lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU> STANDARD SET> VCR HDV/DV and press
HDV.
3 Click Capture on the Step Panel. In the Options Panel, click
.
Digital TV or DVB-T video
Before capturing, have the DVB-T source connected via a compatible capture card installed on your

Page 144

computer first.

To capture DVB-T video:
1 Click the Capture Step then click
Capture Video.
2 In the Capture Step Options Panel, select Digital TV Source from the
Source list.
3 Click Options and select
Video Properties.
4 In Channel List, click
Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the channels first
before capturing.
5 Click
Capture Video.
6 Click
Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and auto-recover DVB-T video.
7 Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.

To recover captured DVB-T videos:
1 Click Tools in the Edit Step and select
Recover DVB-T Video.
2 In the
Recover DVB-T Video dialog box, click Add and browse for the videos to recover.
3 Click
Recover.
Analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the computer.
Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured video in the Options
Panel's
Format list.
Click Options then select
Capture Options to choose how you want footage to be captured.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from, click Options then select
Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings: In the
Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video and select the
Input source (Tuner, S-Video, or Composite). In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video
source to ensure good quality captures. In the Template tab, set the frame size and compression method
to use for saving the captured video.
TV footage
VideoStudio allows you to capture TV footage through a TV tuner. Capture a segment of your favorite
television show on regular TV or cable then save it in your hard drive in AVI or MPEG.

To capture TV footage:
1 Select your TV tuner device from the
Source drop-down list.
2 Click Options: Video Properties to open the
Video Properties dialog box. If needed, adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the

Page 145

Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable TV, scan available channels in your region, and
more.
3 In the
Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
Split by Scene
It often happens that a single DV tape contains several footage that were shot at different times.
VideoStudio saves you the hassle of having to capture the segments one by one then save them as
separate files. The Split by Scene
feature will do that job for you.

To use Split by Scene option in Capture Step:
1 Select the Split by Scene
option in the Options Panel.
2 Click
Capture Video. VideoStudio will automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and
time and capture them as separate files.

DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. To use DV Quick Scan, refer to the first step
in the
DV-to-DVD Wizard section.
In DV Quick Scan, you can add the date and time of your video. After scanning your DV tape, click
Next. This will then display the Capture to Timeline Settings dialog box. Select Insert to Timeline and
choose Add video date information as title. If you want the shooting date to appear in the entire duration
of the video, select
Entire video or only during a specified time.

Importing digital media
You can import DVD/DVD-VR, AVCHD or BDMV video from a disc or hard drive or AVCHD
*.m2ts and *.mts files from a disc or a hard disk into VideoStudio.

To import Digital Media:
1 Click the Capture Step then click Import Digital Media.
Select a Title dialog box opens.
2 Locate the DVD drive that contains the video files and click
Import.
Note: Click Import from Folder to search your hard drive for the video files. Browse for the DVD folder
and click

Page 146

OK.
3 In the Import dialog box, select which DVD tracks to import in
Label. Use the preview screen to view the selected tracks to import.

4 Click
Import to finish. All imported videos will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
Importing videos in AVCHD format
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition), a new high-definition format, efficiently compresses
videos using MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard and produces high quality videos.
You can import AVCHD *.m2ts and *.mts files stored in standard DVDs or hard drives and edit them in
VideoStudio. To import AVCHD videos, follow the steps in Import Digital Media section.

Importing from mobile devices
You can insert media files from your mobile devices like Nokia cellphones, Microsoft Zune, Windows
Mobile 5.0, iPod and PSP to your project.
Note: Make sure your device is properly connected and it can be recognized by VideoStudio.

To import videos from a mobile device:
1 In Capture Step Options Panel, click
Import from Mobile Device.
2 Click the device where you want to import files from in
Device.
3 Click the type of media file you want to add. Click
to display all your media files in the device.
4 Select the media file and click
OK.
Tip: Click
Settings to set where to browse for files and where to save imported and exported files.

To trim video clips before inserting into your project:
1 Select the clip you want to trim and click
to preview the clip.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you
want to set as the start of the clip. Click
.
3 Drag the Jog Slider until you locate the point in the video clip that you want to set as the end of the clip.

Page 147

Click
.
4 Click
OK.

to watch your trimmed clip. When finished, click

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 148

C apture > Direct video capturing to MPEG format

Direct video capturing to MPEG format
VideoStudio supports real-time capturing from DV, analog, or any video source to MPEG-1 and
MPEG-2 formats. Capturing straight to MPEG saves hard drive space as its file size is smaller compared
with DV AVI.

To capture video in MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 format:
1 In the Options Panel, select MPEG from the
Format list to capture MPEG files that are intended for playback on the computer or for sharing on the
Web.
You can also capture VCD, SVCD or DVD-ready MPEG files that can be burnt onto disc by selecting
one of these formats from the
Format list.
2 Click Options and select Video Properties. In the dialog box that opens, select a profile in the
Current Profile drop-down menu.
When MPEG is selected in Format, you can also click Advanced to customize or add templates. The
MPEG Settings dialog box then appears in which you can customize attributes for the MPEG file.
3 Click
OK.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 149

Edit

Edit
The
Edit Step is where you arrange, edit and trim the video clips used in your project. In this step, you can
apply effects and transitions to the existing audio of a video clip, multi-trim or split video, and adjust a
clip's playback speed. You can also choose from a wide selection of video filters to apply to your clips.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 150

Edit > The Edit Step Options Panel

The Edit Step Options Panel
The Edit Step Options Panel allows you to edit the video, image and color clips that you added to the
Video Track. Video filters that you applied to your clips can be fine tuned in the Attribute
tab.
Video tab Duration: Displays the duration of the selected clip in hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You can
trim the selected clip by changing the clip duration. Clip volume: Allows you to adjust the volume of the
audio segment of your video. Mute: Silences the audio segment of your video without deleting it.
Fade-in/out: Gradually increases/decreases the volume of the clip for a smooth transition. Select File:
Preferences - Edit to set the fade-in/out duration. Rotate: Rotates the video clip. Color Correction:
Allows you to adjust the hue, saturation, brightness, contrast, and gamma of the video clip. You can also
adjust the White balance of the video or image clip or make auto tone adjustments. Playback Speed:
Launches the Playback Speed dialog box where you can adjust the pace of your clip. Reverse video:
Plays the video backward. Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame as a new image file and places it
in the Image Library. All enhancements made to the file are discarded before saving. Split Audio: Allows
you to separate the audio from a video file and place it on the Voice Track. Split by Scene: Splits a
captured DV AVI file based on the shooting date and time, or the changes in video content (i.e., motion
change, camera shifting, brightness change, etc.). Multi-trim Video: Allows you to choose desired
segments from a video file and extract them.
Image tab Duration: Sets the duration of the selected image clip. Rotate: Rotates the image clip. Color
Correction: Allows you to adjust the hue, saturation, brightness, contrast, and gamma of the image. You
can also adjust the White balance of the video or image clip or make auto tone adjustments. Resampling
option: Sets how image size is adjusted. Keep aspect ratio: Maintains the relative width and height of the
current image. Fit to project size: Makes the size of the current image the same as the project's frame
size. Pan & Zoom: Applies the Pan & Zoom effect to the current image. Presets: Provides various Pan &
Zoom presets. Choose a preset from the drop-down list. Customize: Allows you to define how to pan
and zoom the current image.
Color tab Duration: Sets the duration of the selected color clip. Color Picker: Click the color box to
adjust the color.
Attribute tab Replace last filter: Allows the last filter applied to a clip to be replaced when you drag a
new filter onto the clip. Clear this option if you want to add multiple filters to your clips. Applied filters:
Lists the video filters that were applied to a clip. Click

or

to arrange the order of the filters; click

to remove a filter. Presets: Provides various filter presets. Choose a preset from the drop-down list.
Customize Filter: Allows you to define the behavior of the filter throughout the clip. Distort clip: Allows
you to modify the size and proportions of the clip. Show grid lines: Select to display the grid lines. Click
to open a dialog box where you can specify settings for the grid lines.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 151

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 152

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 153

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 154

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 155

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 156

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 157

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 158

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 159

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 160

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 161

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 162

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 163

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 164

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 165

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 166

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 167

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 168

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 169

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 170

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 171

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 172

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 173

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 174

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 175

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 176

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 177

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 178

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 179

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 180

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 181

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 182

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 183

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 184

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 185

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 186

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 187

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 188

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 189

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 190

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 191

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 192

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 193

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 194

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 195

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 196

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 197

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 198

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 199

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 200

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 201

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 202

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 203

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 204

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 205

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 206

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 207

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 208

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 209

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 210

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 211

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 212

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 213

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 214

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 215

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 216

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 217

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 218

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 219

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 220

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 221

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 222

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 223

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 224

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 225

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 226

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 227

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 228

Edit > Working with clips > C apturing still images in the Edit Step

Working with clips
Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project and manipulating them
is the most important skill you can master.

Adding clips to the Video Track
You only work on the Video Track when you are in the Edit Step. On the Video Track, you can insert
three types of clips: video, image and color clips.
Video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips on the Video Track: Select a clip in the Library and drag
and drop it to the Video Track. Multiple clips can be selected by pressing [Shift] or [Ctrl]. Right-click a
clip in the Library then select Insert To: Video Track. Select one or more video files in Windows
Explorer then drag and drop to the Video Track. To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video
Track, click Insert Media Files
located to the left of the Timeline.
Notes:
· Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD or DVD-VR formatted discs.
· Use the Fade-in/out buttons
to make the audio of the video clips in your project smoothly fade from one clip to the next.
Images
The ways of adding still images to the Video Track are the same as when adding video clips.
Before you start adding images to your project, determine first the image size that you want for all your
images. By default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the image's aspect ratio.
To make the size of all inserted images the same as your project's frame size, select File: Preferences Edit then change the Image resampling option default to
Fit to project size.
Color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds that are useful for titles. For example, insert a black color clip
as background for end credits. You can use the preset color clips or create new color clips in the
Library.

To select a color clip in the Color Library:
1 Select
Color from the Library drop-down menu.
2 Choose your desired color displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay Track.
3 To load another color that is not in the Library, click the color box beside the Color Picker. Here, you
can select a color either from Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker.

Page 229

4 Set the
Duration of the color clip in the Options Panel.
Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (12.07 - 09.13). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 12.07 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.13 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

Sorting clips in the Library
To arrange clips in the Library, click
in the Library to open the Options menu, then select Sort by
Name or
Sort by Date.
The way video clips are sorted by date depends on the file format. DV AVI files (i.e., AVI files captured
from DV camcorders) will be arranged by order of the shooting date and time of the footage. Other
video file formats will be sorted by order of file date.
Notes:
· You can also right-click on the Library then select the desired sorting type in the
Sort By submenu.
· To toggle between ascending and descending order, select Sort by Name or
Sort by Date again.

Playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to emphasize a
movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical air. Simply adjust the speed
attributes for your video clip by clicking Playback Speed under the Options Panel of the Edit Step.
Drag the slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a value. The higher the
value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range from 10-1000%). You can also specify
a set duration for the clip in Time stretch. Click Preview to view the results of your settings then click
OK when finished.
Tips:
· Hold [Shift]
then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback speed.
· The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow means that you
are changing the playback speed.

Page 230

Reversing video playback
Reverse the playback of the video by selecting
Reverse video in the Options Panel.

Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can snip and trim your
work with frame by frame accuracy. There are three ways of trimming a clip:

To split a clip into two:
1 Select the clip you want to split on the Storyboard or Timeline.
2 Drag the
Jog Slider to the point where you want to cut the clip.

Tip: Click or
to set the cutting point more precisely.
3 Click
to cut the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted clip and
press
[Delete].

To trim a clip with the Trim Handles using Single Clip Trimmer:
1 Double-click a video clip in the Library or right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to
launch the
Trim Video dialog box.
2 Click and drag the Trim handles to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
For more precise trimming, click on a Trim handle, hold it, and use the left or right arrow keys on your
keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can also be set by pressing [F3]
and
[F4], respectively.

Page 231

3 Click Play Clip
to preview the trimmed clip.
Tip: You can also use Zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the Timeline and trim one
frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your project quicker and easier. A wheel
mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by pressing
[Ctrl].

To trim a clip directly on the Timeline:
1 Click a clip on the Timeline
to select it.
2 Drag the yellow Trim handles
on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview Window reflects the position of the Trim
handle in the clip.
3 Or, click the timecode in the
Duration box in the Options Panel and enter the desired clip length.

4 Other clips in your project automatically reposition themselves according to changes made.
Note: Changes made in the video
Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The Mark-in point remains unchanged.

Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit Step to detect different scenes in a video file and automatically
break it down into several clip files.
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI file,
scenes can be detected in two ways: DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their
shooting date and time. Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e., by
Frame Content).

To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file:
1 Go to the
Edit Step and select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2 Click Split by Scene in the Options Panel. This will open the
Scenes dialog box.
3 Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or
Frame Content).
4 Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the Sensitivity
level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5 Click
OK.
6 Click
Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected scenes.

Page 232

You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the scenes that you want
to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number indicates how many scenes are merged
into that particular clip. Click Split
to undo any Join actions that you have done.
7 Click
OK to split the video.

Multi-trimming your video
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple segments. While
Split by Scene is automatically done by the program,
Multi-trim Video gives you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier for
you to manage your project.

1 Timeline zoom
Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into
frames per second.

2 AccuCut Timeline
Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate
mark-in and mark-out positions.

3 Jog Wheel
Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

4 Shuttle Slider
Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

To trim a video file into multiple clips:
1 Go to the Edit Step and click Multi-trim Video in the Options Panel
.
2 View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments in the
Multi-trim Video dialog box.
3 Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can choose to display the
smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
4 Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the beginning frame of
the first segment. Click
Start.
5 Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end. Click
End.
6 Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want kept or removed.
Tips:

Page 233

· To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and
[F4] while playing the video.
· Click Invert Selection
to toggle between marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
·
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse through the movie
using the set value.
7 Click
OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the Timeline.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:
Reverses or advances through the video in
fixed increments. By default, these buttons
move up or down through the video in
increments of 25 seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to
play only the selected segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed
segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the
video.

Using Ad-Zapper
VideoStudio lets you search your videos for commercial intervals. Clicking this feature extracts the
commercials to the media list. Detection sensitivity allows you to control the rate of distinguishing
between commercials. Merge CF merges all your extracted clips that are identified as commercials.

Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene, extracting clips
using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a permanent change to the
clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of safety in that it saves the trimmed video
to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save, select a trimmed clip in the Storyboard, Timeline or the Library and select
Clip: Save Trimmed Video.

Exporting a video file
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share a video file. A video file can be
exported to a Web page, converted to an executable greeting card, sent by e-mail, or set as a desktop
screen saver.
Select a video file in the Library and click
. Choose the type of output for your video.

Capturing still images in the Edit Step
A still image can be captured in the Edit Step by selecting a specific frame on the Timeline and saving it
as an image file. In this manner, possible distortions are avoided since the image is not acquired from a

Page 234

running video, unlike in the
Capture Step.

To capture still images:
1 Select File: Preferences - Capture. Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Captured still image save format. If
you selected JPEG, also set the
Image quality.
2 Select a video clip in your project.
3 Drag the
Jog Slider to the frame you want to capture.

4 Switch to an image folder in the Library. The folder can be the default Image folder, or the one created
by yourself.
5 Select
Clip: Save as Still Image. The new image file is saved to your working folder and is represented as a
thumbnail in the image folder you assigned.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 235

Edit > Ripple Editing

Ripple Editing
Ripple Editing
allows you to insert clips while automatically moving other clips (including empty spaces) aside, to make
room for it on the Timeline. Use this mode to maintain the original track synchronizations when inserting
additional clips. This feature is very useful in using overlay and audio tracks that you intend to play along
with a particular moment in the video. This also makes editing more efficient by keeping all tracks intact,
using the video track as reference.

To insert clips in Ripple Editing mode:
1 Click Ripple Editing
to activate the panel, then select the corresponding box for each track where you want to apply Ripple
Editing.
2 Drag the clip to insert from the Library to the desired position on the Timeline. As soon as the new clip
is in place, all clips where Ripple Editing
is applied will shift accordingly while maintaining their track positions relative to one another.
Note:
Ripple Editing also works in removing clips.

Page 236

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 237

Edit > Enabling Smart Proxy

Enabling Smart Proxy
Proxy files are lower resolution working copies of video files. They are reduced in resolution or
compression bit rate for only one reason -- to speed up editing of high definition files such as HDV,
AVCHD, etc. Proxy files are source-dependent rather than project-dependent. In other words, proxy
files can be shared among different projects. Smart Proxy can also be used in other video file formats and
is not limited to HDV files only. The main purpose of this feature is to have a more efficient editing
experience by making smaller proxy files out of large videos.
When you edit and preview your project in
Instant Play mode, proxy files will be used as substitutes for their large video source counterparts.
Whereas when you preview your project in high-quality playback mode or when you render a video file,
the original video source files will be used.
To enable the creation of proxy files, go to File: Preferences - Smart Proxy, then select the Enable Smart
Proxy option. In the Smart Proxy tab of the Preferences dialog box, you can set the condition when
proxy files need to be generated and choose a proxy file format. Or you can also click
in the Toolbar
and select Enable Smart Proxy. Select
Settings to customize Smart Proxy settings.
Notes:
· The Smart Proxy feature is enabled in VideoStudio program startup.
· The
Smart Proxy File Manager contains files that have been applied with Smart Proxy.
· The
Smart Proxy Queue Manager contains files waiting in queue to be applied with the Smart Proxy feature.
In the case of HDV files, Smart Proxy is automatically activated during capture and use of HDV files in
your project.
Once Smart Proxy is enabled, proxy files will automatically be created and used in your project
whenever you insert video files into the Timeline.
In the Toolbar, click
and select Smart Proxy Queue Manager to see the list of video files to be
generated as proxy files. Select the files you want to include in your queue and then click
OK.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 238

Edit > C onverting multiple files

Converting multiple files
Batch Convert allows you to simultaneously convert a large number of files to another format.

To do Batch Convert:
1 Click
.
2 Click
Add and then choose the files you want to convert.
3 Select an output folder in
Save in folder.
4 In
Save as type, choose your desired output type.
5 Click
Convert.
The result is shown in the Task Report dialog box. Click
OK to finish.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 239

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 240

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 241

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 242

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 243

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 244

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 245

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 246

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 247

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 248

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 249

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 250

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 251

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 252

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 253

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 254

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 255

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 256

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 257

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 258

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 259

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 260

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 261

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 262

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 263

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 264

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 265

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 266

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 267

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 268

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 269

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 270

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 271

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 272

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 273

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 274

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 275

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 276

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 277

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 278

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 279

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 280

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 281

Edit > Enhancing clips > Resizing and distorting clips

Enhancing clips
VideoStudio lets you improve the quality of a video or image clip by adjusting its current properties such
as its color settings in
Color Correction.

Adjusting color and brightness
Adjust color and brightness settings of images and video on the Timeline by clicking
Color Correction in the Options Panel.

To adjust color and brightness:
1 Select the video or image clip to enhance on the Timeline.
2 Drag the sliders to the right to intensify the Hue, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast or Gamma of the clip.
3 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Note: Click
Reset to restore the original color settings of the clip.

Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing wrong color casts due to
conflicting light source and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or yellowish in an
image or video clip. To successfully achieve its natural effect, you need to identify a reference point in
your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives you different options in selecting the
white point: Auto: Gives you automatic calculation of the fitted white point that is well-matched with the
overall color of your image. Pick Color: Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use
the Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray. White balance
presets: Automatically selects white point by matching specific light conditions or scenarios. Temperature:
Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K). Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high color temperature.

To adjust White balance:
1 Select an image or video clip on the Timeline or the Library.
2 In the Edit Step Options Panel, click
Color Correction.
3 Select
White balance.
4 Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different options (Auto, Pick
color, White balance presets or
Temperature).

Page 282

5 If you have selected Pick color, choose
Show preview to display a preview area in the Options Panel.
6 When you drag your cursor to the Preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7 Click to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white.
8 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
Tip: Click the White balance drop-down arrow to display more color adjustments you can use. Select
Vivid Color or Normal Color for the color intensity. The Weaker, Normal and
Stronger options specify the level of sensitivity of White balance.

Adjusting tones
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips, click Color Correction in the Edit Step Options
Panel and select Auto Tone Adjustment. You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter,
Normal, Darker or Darkest by clicking the
Auto Tone Adjustment drop-down menu.

Applying video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or appearance. For
example, you can improve the color balance of a clip, or make it look like a painting.
Video filter samples: DeBlock: Smoothens uneven areas in a clip and reduces noise like block artifacts or
mosquito effect that are usually found in some highly compressed videos. DeSnow: Removes visible and
dynamic "snowy" noise patterns in videos captured from sources with poor TV signals or video clips
usually taken under low lighting conditions or by cameras with high ISO values. Anti-shake: Allows you
to correct or stabilize sub-standard videos due to camera shake.

To apply a video filter to a clip (video or image) in the Video Track:
1 Select a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click the Attribute tab in the Edit Step Options Panel
.
3 Choose a video filter from the Video Filter folder in the Library
to apply to your clip (by clicking the thumbnail).
4 Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip in the Video Track.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the clip.
Clear
Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows you to apply a maximum of
five filters to a single clip. You can also choose the filter to be previewed through the selection in the view
toggle. In the event that you choose to render your project, only enabled filters will be included in your
movie.

Page 283

5 Click Customize Filter in the Options Panel
to customize the attributes of the video filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
6 Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
Note: When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters by
clicking
or
. Changing the order of the video filters will have drastic effects on your clip.

Key frame settings
VideoStudio allows you to customize video filters in a variety of ways. One way is by adding key frames
to your clips. Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or behavior for
your video filter. This gives you the flexibility to determine how your video filter will look like at any point
in a clip.

To set key frames for your clips:
1 Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2 Click
Customize Filter. The dialog box for the video filter opens.
Note:
Settings available in the dialog box are different for each video filter.
3 In the Key frame controls, drag the
Jog Slider or use the arrows to go to the frame where you'd like to change the attributes of your video
filter.

Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for precise placement
of key frames.
4 Click Add key frame
to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the video filter settings for that particular
frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark
on the Timeline Control bar will appear. This indicates the frame is a key frame in the clip.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6 Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
· To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame

Page 284

.
· Click Reverse key frames
to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline such that the sequence starts with the last key
frame and ends with the first key frame.
· To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame
.
· To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame
.
7 Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
8 Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play
in the Preview Window of the dialog box.
9 Click
OK when finished.
Tip: You can preview the clip with applied video filter on VideoStudio's Preview Window or an external
device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
Click
, then click
to open the
Preview Playback Options dialog box where you can choose the display medium.

Panning & Zooming
Pan & Zoom is applied to still images, and it emulates the pan and zoom effect of a video camera. To
apply this effect to an image, select an image clip on the Timeline, then select Pan & Zoom and click
Customize Pan & Zoom.
Note: Pan & Zoom cannot be applied to masked images.
In the Pan & Zoom dialog box, the crosshairs
in the Image Window represent the key frames in the image clip where settings can be customized to
produce the pan and zoom effect. When customizing each key frame, use the Image Window to focus on
an area or to pan the image; use the Options tab settings to customize the zooming effect.
The procedure below shows an example of how to first zoom in on a subject, then pan and zoom out to
show the whole image.

To apply Pan & Zoom:
1 Drag the
Start key frame, represented by a crosshair in the Image Window, to the subject that you want to focus.

Page 285

2 Zoom in on the subject by minimizing the marquee box or by increasing the
Zoom ratio.

3 Drag the crosshair of the
End key frame to your desired final point.

4 Click
to preview the effect.
5 Click
OK to apply the effect to the image.
Tips:
· Click the
Anchor boxes to move the marquee box at fixed positions in the Image Window.
· To zoom in or out of a fixed area without panning the image, select
No panning.
· To include a fade-in/out effect, increase the Transparency. The image will fade to the Background
color. Click the color box to choose a background color, or click
to select a color on the Image Window.

Resizing and distorting clips
To resize or distort a clip:
1 Select a clip in the Video Track then select the
Attribute tab under the Options Panel.

Page 286

2 Select
Distort clip then drag any of the following handles:
· Yellow handles at the corners to resize the clip proportionally (
A).
· Yellow handles at the sides to resize without maintaining proportions (
B).
· Green handles at the corners to skew the clip (
C).

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 287

Edit > Adding cues and chapters

Adding cues and chapters
Adding cues and chapters helps you to navigate through your project once you have recorded them onto
a disc.

To add project cues:
1 Click the
Chapter/Cue Menu.

2 Select
Cue Point.
3 Drag the cursor to the part of the project you want to add cues and click the bar below the Timeline
ruler. Notice that a blue arrow icon was added.

Another step of adding cue points is to drag the Timeline slider to the desired cue point position in your
project. Click the
Add/Remove Cue Point.

4 Repeat Step 3 to add more cue points.
Tip: You can also use the Cue Point Manager when adding cue points. Select Add and specify the
timecode and name of cue for easy identification. Click OK and then
Close.

To add chapters:
1 Make sure that the Chapter Point is selected in the
Chapter/Cue Menu.

Page 288

2 Drag the cursor to the part of the project you want to assign as chapters and click the bar below the
Timeline ruler. Notice that, below your Timeline ruler, yellow chapter points are set as markers in your
movie.

You can also drag the Timeline slider to the desired chapter point position in your project. Click the
Add/Remove Chapter Point.
3 To edit a chapter, click on a chapter point you want to edit and drag to a new position.
4 To rename, double click a chapter point and then enter a new chapter name. Click
OK.
Note: To remove chapters and cues, simply drag the markers outside the Timeline ruler and then drop.
Or you can also drag the Timeline ruler to the chapter or cue point you want to remove and then click
Add/Remove Chapter Point or
Add/Remove Cue Point.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 289

Effect

Effect
Transition effects make your movie smoothly change from one scene to the next. They are applied
between clips in the Video Track and their attributes can be modified in the Options Panel. Effective use
of this feature can add a professional touch to your movie.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 290

Effect > The Effect Step Options Panel

The Effect Step Options Panel
VideoStudio takes care of all the details to make your transitions smooth and professional. You can
further customize your transitions after adding them to your project. The
Effect Step Options Panel displays the settings of your selected transition so that you can change their
various attributes. This gives you complete control of exactly how your transitions will behave and look
like in your movie.
Note: The attributes in the Options Panel vary depending on the type of transition effect that is selected
and applied to your project. Duration: Shows the duration of the applied effect on the selected clip in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You can adjust the duration by changing the timecode values. Border:
Determines the thickness of the border. Enter 0 to remove the border. Color: Determines the hue of the
transition effect's border or flap. Soft edge: Specifies how well you want the transition effect to blend with
the clips. A Strong soft edge results in a less pronounced transition, thus creating a smooth progression
from one clip to another. This option works best for irregular shapes and angles. Direction: Specifies the
direction of a transition effect. (This is only applicable to some of the transition effects.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 291

Effect > Adding transitions > The Mask transitions

Adding transitions
The Library
provides a wide range of preset transitions from crossfades to explosions that you can add to your
project.

Note: By default, you need to manually add transitions to your project. But when two clips overlap each
other on the timeline, a default transition effect is added between the overlapping clips. If you want
VideoStudio to automatically add transitions between clips, select File: Preferences - Edit then select
Automatically add transition effect and choose a transition effect from the Default transition effect
drop-down menu. This saves you time in adding transitions, especially when you are creating a
slideshow project that contains images only, since transitions are applied and automatically added
between images based on the transition effect you specified as the default transition.

To add a transition:
1 Click the Effect Step, then select one of the categories of transitions from the
Folders list.
2 Scroll through the effects thumbnails in the Library. Select and drag an effect to the Timeline
, roughly between two video clips. Drop your effect and it will snap into place. You can only drag and
drop one clip at a time.
Tip: Double-clicking a transition in the Library automatically inserts it into the first empty transition slot
between two clips. Repeating this process will insert a transition into the next empty transition slot.
To replace a transition in your project, drag the new transition from the Library onto the transition
thumbnail to be replaced on the Storyboard or Timeline.

The Album transition
One of the transitions you will find in the Library is the
Album transition. Album simulates the turning pages similar to that of flipping photo album pages. You
can choose from a variety of album layouts, change the album cover, background, size, and position, and
more.

Page 292

To apply the Album transition:
1 Click the Effect Step then select
Album from the Library.
Apply by dragging a transition thumbnail in between two clips on the Video Track.
2 In the Options Panel, click Customize to open the
Flip-Album dialog box.
3 In the
Layout section, choose the desired look for the album.
4 In the Album tab, set the album's Size, Position and
Orientation.
To change the album cover, select a preset from Album cover templates, or select
Custom album cover then import your own cover image.
5 Click the
Background and Shadow tab.
To change the background of the album, select a preset from Background templates, or select
Custom background then import your own background image.
To add a shadow, select Shadow. Set the shadow position by adjusting the X and Y-offset values. To
make the shadow look softer, increase
Soft edge.
Note: To change the shadow color, click the color box and choose the desired color.
6 Click the
Page A tab. Customize the first page of the album.
To change the image on the page, select a preset from Album page templates, or select
Custom album page then import your own image.
To adjust the size and position of the clip on the page, adjust the Size, X, and
Y values.
7 Click the
Page B tab. Customize the second page of the album.
Follow step 6 to make adjustments.
8 Use the slider and buttons below the Preview
Window in the dialog box to preview the results.
9 Click
OK to apply the adjustments.

The Flashback transition
You can use the Flashback transition to simulate a flashback or introduce a dream sequence for the next
scene. Light is added to the dissolving scenes to create a dreamy effect.

The Flashback transition contains the following options: Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of
the mask. Halo brightness: Set the intensity of the light. Halo size: Set the coverage of the light. Contrast:
Set the color contrast between the two clips. Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving
mask. Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

The Mask transitions

Page 293

Different patterns or objects such as shapes, leaves, balls, and more can be used in transition effects by
rendering them as masks. You can select from preset masks or import a BMP file and use it as a mask
for your transition.
MaskA

MaskB

MaskC

MaskD

MaskE

MaskF

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 294

Effect > Adding transitions > The Mask transitions

Adding transitions
The Library
provides a wide range of preset transitions from crossfades to explosions that you can add to your
project.

Note: By default, you need to manually add transitions to your project. But when two clips overlap each
other on the timeline, a default transition effect is added between the overlapping clips. If you want
VideoStudio to automatically add transitions between clips, select File: Preferences - Edit then select
Automatically add transition effect and choose a transition effect from the Default transition effect
drop-down menu. This saves you time in adding transitions, especially when you are creating a
slideshow project that contains images only, since transitions are applied and automatically added
between images based on the transition effect you specified as the default transition.

To add a transition:
1 Click the Effect Step, then select one of the categories of transitions from the
Folders list.
2 Scroll through the effects thumbnails in the Library. Select and drag an effect to the Timeline
, roughly between two video clips. Drop your effect and it will snap into place. You can only drag and
drop one clip at a time.
Tip: Double-clicking a transition in the Library automatically inserts it into the first empty transition slot
between two clips. Repeating this process will insert a transition into the next empty transition slot.
To replace a transition in your project, drag the new transition from the Library onto the transition
thumbnail to be replaced on the Storyboard or Timeline.

The Album transition
One of the transitions you will find in the Library is the
Album transition. Album simulates the turning pages similar to that of flipping photo album pages. You
can choose from a variety of album layouts, change the album cover, background, size, and position, and
more.

Page 295

To apply the Album transition:
1 Click the Effect Step then select
Album from the Library.
Apply by dragging a transition thumbnail in between two clips on the Video Track.
2 In the Options Panel, click Customize to open the
Flip-Album dialog box.
3 In the
Layout section, choose the desired look for the album.
4 In the Album tab, set the album's Size, Position and
Orientation.
To change the album cover, select a preset from Album cover templates, or select
Custom album cover then import your own cover image.
5 Click the
Background and Shadow tab.
To change the background of the album, select a preset from Background templates, or select
Custom background then import your own background image.
To add a shadow, select Shadow. Set the shadow position by adjusting the X and Y-offset values. To
make the shadow look softer, increase
Soft edge.
Note: To change the shadow color, click the color box and choose the desired color.
6 Click the
Page A tab. Customize the first page of the album.
To change the image on the page, select a preset from Album page templates, or select
Custom album page then import your own image.
To adjust the size and position of the clip on the page, adjust the Size, X, and
Y values.
7 Click the
Page B tab. Customize the second page of the album.
Follow step 6 to make adjustments.
8 Use the slider and buttons below the Preview
Window in the dialog box to preview the results.
9 Click
OK to apply the adjustments.

The Flashback transition
You can use the Flashback transition to simulate a flashback or introduce a dream sequence for the next
scene. Light is added to the dissolving scenes to create a dreamy effect.

The Flashback transition contains the following options: Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of
the mask. Halo brightness: Set the intensity of the light. Halo size: Set the coverage of the light. Contrast:
Set the color contrast between the two clips. Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving
mask. Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

The Mask transitions

Page 296

Different patterns or objects such as shapes, leaves, balls, and more can be used in transition effects by
rendering them as masks. You can select from preset masks or import a BMP file and use it as a mask
for your transition.
MaskA

MaskB

MaskC

MaskD

MaskE

MaskF

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 297

Effect > Adding transitions > The Mask transitions

Adding transitions
The Library
provides a wide range of preset transitions from crossfades to explosions that you can add to your
project.

Note: By default, you need to manually add transitions to your project. But when two clips overlap each
other on the timeline, a default transition effect is added between the overlapping clips. If you want
VideoStudio to automatically add transitions between clips, select File: Preferences - Edit then select
Automatically add transition effect and choose a transition effect from the Default transition effect
drop-down menu. This saves you time in adding transitions, especially when you are creating a
slideshow project that contains images only, since transitions are applied and automatically added
between images based on the transition effect you specified as the default transition.

To add a transition:
1 Click the Effect Step, then select one of the categories of transitions from the
Folders list.
2 Scroll through the effects thumbnails in the Library. Select and drag an effect to the Timeline
, roughly between two video clips. Drop your effect and it will snap into place. You can only drag and
drop one clip at a time.
Tip: Double-clicking a transition in the Library automatically inserts it into the first empty transition slot
between two clips. Repeating this process will insert a transition into the next empty transition slot.
To replace a transition in your project, drag the new transition from the Library onto the transition
thumbnail to be replaced on the Storyboard or Timeline.

The Album transition
One of the transitions you will find in the Library is the
Album transition. Album simulates the turning pages similar to that of flipping photo album pages. You
can choose from a variety of album layouts, change the album cover, background, size, and position, and
more.

Page 298

To apply the Album transition:
1 Click the Effect Step then select
Album from the Library.
Apply by dragging a transition thumbnail in between two clips on the Video Track.
2 In the Options Panel, click Customize to open the
Flip-Album dialog box.
3 In the
Layout section, choose the desired look for the album.
4 In the Album tab, set the album's Size, Position and
Orientation.
To change the album cover, select a preset from Album cover templates, or select
Custom album cover then import your own cover image.
5 Click the
Background and Shadow tab.
To change the background of the album, select a preset from Background templates, or select
Custom background then import your own background image.
To add a shadow, select Shadow. Set the shadow position by adjusting the X and Y-offset values. To
make the shadow look softer, increase
Soft edge.
Note: To change the shadow color, click the color box and choose the desired color.
6 Click the
Page A tab. Customize the first page of the album.
To change the image on the page, select a preset from Album page templates, or select
Custom album page then import your own image.
To adjust the size and position of the clip on the page, adjust the Size, X, and
Y values.
7 Click the
Page B tab. Customize the second page of the album.
Follow step 6 to make adjustments.
8 Use the slider and buttons below the Preview
Window in the dialog box to preview the results.
9 Click
OK to apply the adjustments.

The Flashback transition
You can use the Flashback transition to simulate a flashback or introduce a dream sequence for the next
scene. Light is added to the dissolving scenes to create a dreamy effect.

The Flashback transition contains the following options: Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of
the mask. Halo brightness: Set the intensity of the light. Halo size: Set the coverage of the light. Contrast:
Set the color contrast between the two clips. Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving
mask. Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

The Mask transitions

Page 299

Different patterns or objects such as shapes, leaves, balls, and more can be used in transition effects by
rendering them as masks. You can select from preset masks or import a BMP file and use it as a mask
for your transition.
MaskA

MaskB

MaskC

MaskD

MaskE

MaskF

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 300

Effect > Adding transitions > The Mask transitions

Adding transitions
The Library
provides a wide range of preset transitions from crossfades to explosions that you can add to your
project.

Note: By default, you need to manually add transitions to your project. But when two clips overlap each
other on the timeline, a default transition effect is added between the overlapping clips. If you want
VideoStudio to automatically add transitions between clips, select File: Preferences - Edit then select
Automatically add transition effect and choose a transition effect from the Default transition effect
drop-down menu. This saves you time in adding transitions, especially when you are creating a
slideshow project that contains images only, since transitions are applied and automatically added
between images based on the transition effect you specified as the default transition.

To add a transition:
1 Click the Effect Step, then select one of the categories of transitions from the
Folders list.
2 Scroll through the effects thumbnails in the Library. Select and drag an effect to the Timeline
, roughly between two video clips. Drop your effect and it will snap into place. You can only drag and
drop one clip at a time.
Tip: Double-clicking a transition in the Library automatically inserts it into the first empty transition slot
between two clips. Repeating this process will insert a transition into the next empty transition slot.
To replace a transition in your project, drag the new transition from the Library onto the transition
thumbnail to be replaced on the Storyboard or Timeline.

The Album transition
One of the transitions you will find in the Library is the
Album transition. Album simulates the turning pages similar to that of flipping photo album pages. You
can choose from a variety of album layouts, change the album cover, background, size, and position, and
more.

Page 301

To apply the Album transition:
1 Click the Effect Step then select
Album from the Library.
Apply by dragging a transition thumbnail in between two clips on the Video Track.
2 In the Options Panel, click Customize to open the
Flip-Album dialog box.
3 In the
Layout section, choose the desired look for the album.
4 In the Album tab, set the album's Size, Position and
Orientation.
To change the album cover, select a preset from Album cover templates, or select
Custom album cover then import your own cover image.
5 Click the
Background and Shadow tab.
To change the background of the album, select a preset from Background templates, or select
Custom background then import your own background image.
To add a shadow, select Shadow. Set the shadow position by adjusting the X and Y-offset values. To
make the shadow look softer, increase
Soft edge.
Note: To change the shadow color, click the color box and choose the desired color.
6 Click the
Page A tab. Customize the first page of the album.
To change the image on the page, select a preset from Album page templates, or select
Custom album page then import your own image.
To adjust the size and position of the clip on the page, adjust the Size, X, and
Y values.
7 Click the
Page B tab. Customize the second page of the album.
Follow step 6 to make adjustments.
8 Use the slider and buttons below the Preview
Window in the dialog box to preview the results.
9 Click
OK to apply the adjustments.

The Flashback transition
You can use the Flashback transition to simulate a flashback or introduce a dream sequence for the next
scene. Light is added to the dissolving scenes to create a dreamy effect.

The Flashback transition contains the following options: Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of
the mask. Halo brightness: Set the intensity of the light. Halo size: Set the coverage of the light. Contrast:
Set the color contrast between the two clips. Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving
mask. Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

The Mask transitions

Page 302

Different patterns or objects such as shapes, leaves, balls, and more can be used in transition effects by
rendering them as masks. You can select from preset masks or import a BMP file and use it as a mask
for your transition.
MaskA

MaskB

MaskC

MaskD

MaskE

MaskF

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 303

Effect > Mask transition options

Mask transition options
The Mask transitions contain the following options. The availability of the option depends on the type of
mask selected. Masks: Select a preset template to use as mask for the transition. Current: Click to open
a dialog box where you can browse BMP files to use as the transition's mask. Middle flash: Adds an
element of light to the dissolving mask. X/Y Opposite: Reverses the path direction of the Mask. Sync
Clip: Matches the motion of the clip to the motion of the mask. Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.
Rotation: Specifies how many degrees the mask will rotate. Fade level: Sets the thickness of the soft edge
of the mask. Size: Sets the size of the mask.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 304

Effect > Adding transitions to My Favorites

Adding transitions to My Favorites
You can collect your favorite transitions from different categories and compile it in
My Favorites folder. This way, you can easily search the transition effects you use more often.

To save a transition in My Favorites:
1 Right-click a transition effect in the Library.
2 Select
Add to My Favorites.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 305

Effect > Applying selected transition effect to all clips

Applying selected transition effect to all clips
You can apply a transition effect to all clips without having to manually drag the effect to the Timeline.
Select a transition effect in the Library and click
. Select
Apply current effect to video track or you can right-click on the transition effect and select the same
option.
To insert randomly selected transition effects, select
Apply random effect(s) to video track.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 306

Overlay

Overlay
The
Overlay Step allows you to add overlay clips to combine with your videos in the Video Track. Use an
Overlay clip to create a picture-in-picture effect or add a lower-third to create more professional-looking
movie productions.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 307

Overlay > The Overlay Step Options Panel

The Overlay Step Options Panel
There are two tabs in the Overlay Step Options Panel: Edit tab and Attribute
tab.
Edit tab
The
Edit tab allows you to customize properties such as clip duration, playback speed, and audio properties
of the Overlay clip. The available options in this tab will depend on the selected Overlay clip.
Attribute tab
The
Attribute tab allows you to apply motion, transparency, filters and border to the Overlay clip. Mask &
Chroma Key: Opens the Overlay Options Panel where you can specify the transparency and Overlay
options to be applied to the Overlay clip. Attribute Options: Displays various commands you can apply
to the Overlay clip. Replace last filter: Allows the last filter applied to a clip to be replaced when you drag
a new filter onto the clip. Clear this option if you want to add multiple filters to your clips. Applied filters:
Lists the video filters that were applied to a clip. Click

or

to arrange the order of the filters.

Delete filter: Removes the selected filter from the Overlay clip. Click
to remove a filter. Presets:
Opens a menu where you can select a preset for the selected filter to apply to the Overlay clip.
Customize filter: Opens a dialog box where you can define settings and options for the selected filter.
Direction/Style: Sets the type of movement to be applied to the Overlay clip. Enter/Exit: Sets the
directions in which the clip will enter and leave the screen. Rotate before/after pause duration: Select to
rotate the clip before or after pause duration. Fade-in/Fade-out motion effect: Select to gradually
increase or decrease the transparency of the clip when it enters or leaves the screen. Show grid lines:
Select to display the grid lines. Click
to open a dialog box where you can specify settings for the grid
lines.
Mask & Chroma Key Options Panel Transparency: Sets the opacity of the clip. Drag the slider or
enter a value to adjust the transparency. Border: Enter a value to set the thickness of the border. Click
the Color Box to select the border color. Apply Overlay options: Select to specify how transparent
section of the Overlay clip will be rendered. Type: Select to apply preset or imported masks on an
Overlay clip or specify a color to be rendered as transparent. Similarity: Specifies the color range of a
selected color's pixels that will be rendered as transparent. Click the Color Box then select the color that
will be rendered as transparent. Click
previous Options Panel.

to select a color in the Overlay clip.

: Goes back to the

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 308

Overlay > Adding clips to the Overlay Track

Adding clips to the Overlay Track
Drag media files to the Overlay Track on the Timeline to add them as overlay clips for your project.

To add a clip to the Overlay Track:
1 In the Library, select the media folder that contains the Overlay clip that you want to add to your
project.
Tip: To load media files into the Library, click . In the dialog box that opens, locate the media file and
click
Open.
2 Drag the media file from the Library to the Overlay Track on the Timeline
.

Tips:
· To insert a media file directly to the Overlay Track, right-click the Overlay Track and select the type of
file you want to add. The file will not be added into the Library.
· You can also use color clips as Overlay clips.
3 Customize the Overlay clip using the options available in the
Edit tab.
4 Click the
Attribute tab. The Overlay clip is then resized to a preset size and positioned at the center. Use the
options in the Attribute tab to apply motion to the Overlay clip, add filters, resize and reposition the clip,
and more.
Tips
:
· To make Overlay clips with transparent backgrounds, you can create a 32-bit alpha channel AVI video
file or an image file with an alpha channel. You can use an animation program such as Ulead COOL 3D
Production Studio or an image editing program such as Ulead PhotoImpact to create these video and
image files.
· Another alternative is to use VideoStudio's Mask & Chroma Key function to mask a specific color on
an image.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 309

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 310

Overlay > Adding Multiple Tracks

Adding Multiple Tracks
You can also insert media files on another Overlay Track for added impact for your movie. You can
either show or hide these Overlay Tracks in your project. Click
Track Manager in the Toolbar to open the Track Manager dialog box. Select the Overlay Tracks to
display.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 311

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 312

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 313

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 314

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 315

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 316

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 317

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 318

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 319

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 320

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 321

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 322

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 323

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 324

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 325

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 326

Overlay > Working with Overlay clips > Applying motion to the Overlay clip

Working with Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or add objects
and frames to your video. Achieving different effects for your projects can be easy when you know how
to use Overlay clips and tracks.

Trimming Overlay clips
You can trim a clip in the Overlay Track like the way you trim a clip in the Video Track. To cut clips in
the Video and Overlay Tracks all at once, select Project as the Play mode and then drag the slider to the
part you want to cut. Click
.

Repositioning the current Overlay clip
Click to select the Overlay clip on the Timeline.

After clicking the Attribute tab, drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window. It is
recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
You can also click
Alignment Options in the Attribute tab to open a menu where you can automatically place the Overlay
clip in a preset position on the video. Here, you can also resize the Overlay clip to keep the aspect ratio,
revert it to the default size, use the original size of the Overlay clip, or resize it to occupy the entire
screen.

Resizing an Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, drag a handle on the Overlay clip on the Preview Window to resize it. If
you drag a yellow corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.

Page 327

It is recommended that you keep the Overlay clip within the title safe area.
The Keep Aspect Ratio in
Attribute Options resizes the Overlay clip based on the width or height, depending on which is longer in
length, of the Overlay clip.

Note: When you resize or distort the Overlay clip then go back to the Edit
tab, the clip will appear to have resized back to its original size. This is only for editing purposes, the
Overlay clip retains its properties.

Distorting an Overlay clip
Each corner of the marquee of the Overlay clip have green nodes which you can use to distort the
Overlay clip. Drag the green nodes to distort the Overlay clip.

Tip: Hold [Shift]
while dragging the green nodes to keep the distortion within the current clip's marquee.

Applying motion to the Overlay clip
After clicking the Attribute tab, select where the Overlay clip will Enter and Exit the screen under
Direction/Style. Click a specific arrow as to where you want your clip to enter and exit in your movie.
Tip: Pause Duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before the clip exits
the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim handles to set the
Pause Duration.

Page 328

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 329

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 330

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 331

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 332

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 333

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 334

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 335

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 336

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 337

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 338

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 339

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 340

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 341

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 342

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 343

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 344

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 345

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 346

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 347

Overlay > Enhancing Overlay clips > Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips

Enhancing Overlay clips
Applying transparency, border and filters are some of the ways you can enhance your Overlay clips. You
can also chroma key the Overlay clip to remove its background color and show the clip in the Video
Track as the new background.

Applying transparency to the Overlay clip
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the
Transparency slider to set the opacity of the Overlay clip.

Chroma keying an Overlay clip
Chroma key is a popular technique that makes a particular color in a clip transparent to be able to show
underlying clips, objects or layers. Usually, Chroma Key is used as special effects in movies or a TV
program's weather forecast.

To specify Chroma Key settings to the current Overlay clip:
1 Click
Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Chroma Key in
Type.
3 Click the color box and select the color to be rendered as transparent. Or select
and then click a color in the preview area of the Options Panel that will be rendered as transparent.

Page 348

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.

Tip: Drag the Similarity slider
to specify the color range of the selected color that will be rendered as transparent.

Adding a mask frame
Masking is a powerful method to control your clip's transparency. A mask or a matte, as it is also called,
is simply a black and white image you can use in your projects to define which areas of your video
become transparent and which remain opaque.

To add a mask frame:
1 Click Mask & Chroma Key in the Attribute tab to go to the
Overlay Options Panel.
2 Select Apply Overlay options then Mask Frame in
Type.
3 Select a mask frame.

4 Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings are affecting the image.
5 To import a mask frame, first create a mask for your project. Click
and browse for the image file.

Page 349

Adding a border
In the Attribute tab, click Mask & Chroma Key to go to the Overlay Options Panel. Drag the Border
slider to set the thickness of the border of the Overlay clip. Set the color of the border by clicking the
color box beside the slider.

Applying a filter to the Overlay clip
You can apply video filters to your Overlay clips. For more details on how to apply, you can refer to
Edit: Applying video filters.

Using the same attributes for different Overlay clips
You can use the attributes (size and position) of one Overlay clip and apply it to a different Overlay clip
on your movie project. To apply the same attributes, first right-click the source Overlay clip then select
Copy Attributes. Next, right-click the target Overlay clip then select
Paste Attributes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 350

Overlay > Adding Objects or Frames

Adding Objects or Frames
Add decorative objects or frames to your videos as Overlay clips.

To add an object or frame:
1 In the Library, select Decoration: Object/Frame in the
Gallery list.
2 Select an object/frame then drag it onto the Overlay Track on the Timeline
.
3 Click the
Attribute tab to resize and reposition the object/frame.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 351

Overlay > Adding Flash animations > C ustomizing current objects, frames and animations

Adding Flash animations
Give more life to your videos by adding Flash animations as Overlay clips.

To add a Flash animation:
1 In the Library, select Flash Animation in the
Gallery list.
2 Select a Flash animation then drag it onto the Overlay Track
.
3 Click the
Attribute tab to resize and reposition the Flash Animation.

Customizing current objects, frames and animations
Use the various options available in the Edit and Attribute
tabs to customize your object and frame. You can add animation, apply transparency, resize the object
or frame, and more.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 352

Overlay > Adding Flash animations > C ustomizing current objects, frames and animations

Adding Flash animations
Give more life to your videos by adding Flash animations as Overlay clips.

To add a Flash animation:
1 In the Library, select Flash Animation in the
Gallery list.
2 Select a Flash animation then drag it onto the Overlay Track
.
3 Click the
Attribute tab to resize and reposition the Flash Animation.

Customizing current objects, frames and animations
Use the various options available in the Edit and Attribute
tabs to customize your object and frame. You can add animation, apply transparency, resize the object
or frame, and more.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 353

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 354

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 355

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 356

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 357

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 358

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 359

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 360

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 361

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 362

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 363

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 364

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 365

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 366

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 367

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 368

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 369

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 370

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 371

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 372

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 373

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 374

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 375

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 376

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 377

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 378

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 379

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 380

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 381

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 382

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 383

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 384

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 385

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 386

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 387

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 388

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 389

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 390

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 391

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 392

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 393

Overlay > Painting images and animations using Painting C reator > Setting your brush preferences

Painting images and animations using
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to draw and paint an image to enhance your
project. Through different sets of brushes and colors, this allows you to record painting sessions or paint
images to serve as overlays to your project and achieve a variety of special effects and enhancements.
To launch the Painting Creator dialog box, click on
in the VideoStudio main window.

Painting Creator interface basics

1 Brush Thickness
Defines the thickness and opacity of your brush tip through a set of sliders and a preview box.
2 Canvas / Preview Window
The painting area.
3 Brush Panel
Choose from a wide array of brush types and control your brush thickness and transparency.
4 Color Palette
Allows you to choose or specify RGB values of your desired color.
5 Macro / Static Painting Library
Contains previously made recorded painting animations and still images.

Painting Creator control buttons and sliders
Page 394

New / Clear Button - Launches a new
canvas or preview window.
Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons Allows you to zoom in and zoom out
your view of the painting.
Actual Size - Reverts your canvas /
preview window to its actual size.
Background image button and slider Clicking on the Background Image
button allows you to embed or use
images as reference for your painting and
control its transparency through the
slider.
Texture Option Button - Allows you to
choose and apply textures to your brush
tips.
Eyedropper Tool - Allows you to select
a color from the color palette or
surrounding objects.
Eraser mode button - Enables you to
write or erase your painting / animation.
Undo Button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Redo button - Allows you to undo and
redo actions in Still Mode.
Record / Add Image buttons - Records
your painting session or adds your
painting to the Painting Library.

Play / Stop buttons - Plays or stops the
current painting animation. Enabled only
in Animation Mode.
Delete button - Deletes an animation or
image from the library.
Change duration button - changes the
duration of the selected clip.
Preference Control button - Launches
the Preferences dialog box.
Change Mode Control buttons - Allows
you to switch between Animation Mode

Page 395

and Still Mode.
OK button - Closes Painting Creator
and inserts the animations and images in
the Video Library and saves the files in
*.uvp format in the VideoStudio Library.
Close button - Closes the Painting
Creator module dialog box.

Painting Creator modes
There are two modes of Painting Creator for you to choose from - the Animation Mode and the Still
Mode.
In
Animation Mode, you can record entire painting sessions and embed your output in the Timeline of
VideoStudio. In this mode, you can create a variety of painting animations to create special effects or to
enhance your video projects.
Still Mode allows you to create image files with the different sets of colors and brushes just like any other
digital imaging programs with a painting atmosphere incorporated with your projects.
To choose between the two modes, click on

found at the bottom of the Painting Creator dialog box

to work on Animation Mode and the
button for the Still Mode. By default, Painting Creator will launch using the Animation Mode.

Changing default clip duration
1 Click on the
Preferences icon. The Preferences dialog box appears.
2 In the
General tab, increase or decrease default macro duration.
3 Click
OK.

Using a reference image
Click on the
Background Image button and the Background Image Option dialog box appears. Refer to the default
background color: Allows you to select a solid background color for your painting or animation. Current
timeline image: Uses the video frame currently being displayed on the timeline. Customize image: Allows
you to open an image and use it as the background for your painting or animation.

Painting a still image
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, paint your still image on the canvas / preview window and
press the
Add Image button when finished. Your painting will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator
Library.

Recording a painting animation
Using the different sets of brushes and colors, press the Start Recording Button and paint your still image
on the canvas / preview window. After finishing all your desired painting steps, press the
Stop Recording button and your painting animation will automatically be saved in the Painting Creator

Page 396

Library.

Playing your painting animations
Choose your desired animations in the Macro/Static Library and select the
Play button.

Importing animations and images in the VideoStudio
Library
Choose your desired animations and images in the Macro/Static Library and choose
OK. VideoStudio will automatically insert your animations in the Library's Video folder and images in the
Images folder both in *.uvp format.

Setting your brush preferences
Click on
and make adjustments to your brush stroke according to your preferences. Move the
sliders and click
OK to keep your settings. Options vary from one tool to another.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 397

Title

Title
While a picture may be worth a thousand words, the text in your video production (i.e., subtitles, opening
and closing credits, etc.) adds to the clarity and comprehensibility of your movie. In VideoStudio's
Title Step, create professional-looking titles, complete with special effects, in minutes.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 398

Title > The Title Step Options Panel

The Title Step Options Panel
The
Title Step Options Panel allows you to modify text properties such as font, size, and color.
Edit tab Duration: Displays the duration of the selected clip in hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You can
adjust the duration by changing the timecode values. Vertical text: Click
to make the orientation of the
title vertical. Font face: Selects your desired font style. Font size: Sets your desired font size. Color:
Specifies your preferred font color. Line spacing: Sets the spacing, or leading, between lines of text.
Rotate by degree: Sets the specified angle and direction (clockwise or counter clockwise) of the text.
Multiple titles: Select to use multiple text boxes for your text. Single title: Select to use a single text box
for your text. This is automatically selected when opening a project file from older versions of
VideoStudio. Text backdrop: Select to apply a solid background bar, ellipse, rectangle, curve-edged
rectangle or a rounded rectangle as background for your text. Click
to use a solid or gradient color
and to set the transparency of the text backdrop. Border/Shadow/Transparency: Sets the border and
intensity of the shadow and transparency of the text. Open subtitle file: Inserts a previously saved movie
subtitle. Save subtitle file: Saves the movie subtitle to a file for future use. Show grid lines: Select to
display the grid lines. Click
to open a dialog box where you can specify grid line settings.
Animation tab Apply Animation: Enables or disables animation of the title clip. Type: Where you can
select your preferred animation effect for your title. Presets: Select a preset for the selected animation
type to apply to your text. Customize animation attributes: Opens a dialog box where you can specify
animation settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 399

Title > Adding text > Saving subtitle files

Adding text
Corel VideoStudio allows you to add text either in multiple text boxes or in a single text box. Using
multiple text boxes gives you the flexibility to position the different words of your text anywhere on the
video frame and allows you to arrange the stacking order of the text. Use a single text box when you are
creating opening titles and end credits for your projects.

To add multiple titles:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Multiple titles.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
3 Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.
Click outside the text box when you are done typing. To add another set of text, double-click again on
the Preview Window.

4 Repeat step
3 to add more sets of text.
If you switch to Single title before adding to the Timeline the multiple text that you entered, only the
selected text or the first text that you typed in (when no text box is selected) will be retained. The other
text boxes will be removed and the Text backdrop and Rotate by degree
options will be reset and disabled.

To add a single title:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Single title.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.

Page 400

3 In the Options Panel, set the
Line spacing.
4 When you are done typing the text, click the Timeline
to add the text to your project.
It is recommended to keep your text within the title safe area. The title safe area is the rectangular box on
the Preview Window. By keeping the text within the bounds of the title safe area, the whole text will not
be truncated when viewed on a TV screen. You can display or hide the title safe area by selecting
File: Preferences - General tab - Display title safe area on Preview Window.

Adding preset text to your project
The Library contains various preset text that you can use for your projects. To use these preset text,
select Title in the
Gallery list then drag the preset text onto the Title Track.

Inserting subtitles to your project
You can use your own movie subtitle files for your project. To insert your own, click Open Subtitle File.
In the Open dialog box, locate the file you want to use and the target track and click
Open.

Note: To open subtitles with non-English characters, select the appropriate option in
Language.
You may choose to place your titles on separate title tracks by selecting from the Import: to title track
number drop-down menu. To edit its text attributes, select the Font, Font size, Font color, Line leading
and Glow shadow for your subtitles. You can also choose
Vertical text to set the text orientation to vertical.

Saving subtitle files
Page 401

Saving movie subtitles allows you to reuse them in the future. Click Save Subtitle File to open the Save
As dialog box. Locate where to save your movie subtitle and the source track and click
Save.
Notes:
· Movie subtitles will automatically be saved as *.utf files.
· To save subtitles in foreign languages like Chinese, Japanese or Greek, click Open Subtitle File in the
Options Panel and browse for the particular file. Before you open the file, however, make sure you select
the corresponding language in
Language.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 402

Title > Adding text > Saving subtitle files

Adding text
Corel VideoStudio allows you to add text either in multiple text boxes or in a single text box. Using
multiple text boxes gives you the flexibility to position the different words of your text anywhere on the
video frame and allows you to arrange the stacking order of the text. Use a single text box when you are
creating opening titles and end credits for your projects.

To add multiple titles:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Multiple titles.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
3 Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.
Click outside the text box when you are done typing. To add another set of text, double-click again on
the Preview Window.

4 Repeat step
3 to add more sets of text.
If you switch to Single title before adding to the Timeline the multiple text that you entered, only the
selected text or the first text that you typed in (when no text box is selected) will be retained. The other
text boxes will be removed and the Text backdrop and Rotate by degree
options will be reset and disabled.

To add a single title:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Single title.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.

Page 403

3 In the Options Panel, set the
Line spacing.
4 When you are done typing the text, click the Timeline
to add the text to your project.
It is recommended to keep your text within the title safe area. The title safe area is the rectangular box on
the Preview Window. By keeping the text within the bounds of the title safe area, the whole text will not
be truncated when viewed on a TV screen. You can display or hide the title safe area by selecting
File: Preferences - General tab - Display title safe area on Preview Window.

Adding preset text to your project
The Library contains various preset text that you can use for your projects. To use these preset text,
select Title in the
Gallery list then drag the preset text onto the Title Track.

Inserting subtitles to your project
You can use your own movie subtitle files for your project. To insert your own, click Open Subtitle File.
In the Open dialog box, locate the file you want to use and the target track and click
Open.

Note: To open subtitles with non-English characters, select the appropriate option in
Language.
You may choose to place your titles on separate title tracks by selecting from the Import: to title track
number drop-down menu. To edit its text attributes, select the Font, Font size, Font color, Line leading
and Glow shadow for your subtitles. You can also choose
Vertical text to set the text orientation to vertical.

Saving subtitle files
Page 404

Saving movie subtitles allows you to reuse them in the future. Click Save Subtitle File to open the Save
As dialog box. Locate where to save your movie subtitle and the source track and click
Save.
Notes:
· Movie subtitles will automatically be saved as *.utf files.
· To save subtitles in foreign languages like Chinese, Japanese or Greek, click Open Subtitle File in the
Options Panel and browse for the particular file. Before you open the file, however, make sure you select
the corresponding language in
Language.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 405

Title > Adding text > Saving subtitle files

Adding text
Corel VideoStudio allows you to add text either in multiple text boxes or in a single text box. Using
multiple text boxes gives you the flexibility to position the different words of your text anywhere on the
video frame and allows you to arrange the stacking order of the text. Use a single text box when you are
creating opening titles and end credits for your projects.

To add multiple titles:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Multiple titles.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
3 Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.
Click outside the text box when you are done typing. To add another set of text, double-click again on
the Preview Window.

4 Repeat step
3 to add more sets of text.
If you switch to Single title before adding to the Timeline the multiple text that you entered, only the
selected text or the first text that you typed in (when no text box is selected) will be retained. The other
text boxes will be removed and the Text backdrop and Rotate by degree
options will be reset and disabled.

To add a single title:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Single title.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.

Page 406

3 In the Options Panel, set the
Line spacing.
4 When you are done typing the text, click the Timeline
to add the text to your project.
It is recommended to keep your text within the title safe area. The title safe area is the rectangular box on
the Preview Window. By keeping the text within the bounds of the title safe area, the whole text will not
be truncated when viewed on a TV screen. You can display or hide the title safe area by selecting
File: Preferences - General tab - Display title safe area on Preview Window.

Adding preset text to your project
The Library contains various preset text that you can use for your projects. To use these preset text,
select Title in the
Gallery list then drag the preset text onto the Title Track.

Inserting subtitles to your project
You can use your own movie subtitle files for your project. To insert your own, click Open Subtitle File.
In the Open dialog box, locate the file you want to use and the target track and click
Open.

Note: To open subtitles with non-English characters, select the appropriate option in
Language.
You may choose to place your titles on separate title tracks by selecting from the Import: to title track
number drop-down menu. To edit its text attributes, select the Font, Font size, Font color, Line leading
and Glow shadow for your subtitles. You can also choose
Vertical text to set the text orientation to vertical.

Saving subtitle files
Page 407

Saving movie subtitles allows you to reuse them in the future. Click Save Subtitle File to open the Save
As dialog box. Locate where to save your movie subtitle and the source track and click
Save.
Notes:
· Movie subtitles will automatically be saved as *.utf files.
· To save subtitles in foreign languages like Chinese, Japanese or Greek, click Open Subtitle File in the
Options Panel and browse for the particular file. Before you open the file, however, make sure you select
the corresponding language in
Language.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 408

Title > Adding text > Saving subtitle files

Adding text
Corel VideoStudio allows you to add text either in multiple text boxes or in a single text box. Using
multiple text boxes gives you the flexibility to position the different words of your text anywhere on the
video frame and allows you to arrange the stacking order of the text. Use a single text box when you are
creating opening titles and end credits for your projects.

To add multiple titles:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Multiple titles.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
3 Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.
Click outside the text box when you are done typing. To add another set of text, double-click again on
the Preview Window.

4 Repeat step
3 to add more sets of text.
If you switch to Single title before adding to the Timeline the multiple text that you entered, only the
selected text or the first text that you typed in (when no text box is selected) will be retained. The other
text boxes will be removed and the Text backdrop and Rotate by degree
options will be reset and disabled.

To add a single title:
1 In the Options Panel, select
Single title.
2 Use the buttons in the
Navigation Panel to scan your movie and select the frame where you want to add the title.
Double-click the Preview Window and type in your text.

Page 409

3 In the Options Panel, set the
Line spacing.
4 When you are done typing the text, click the Timeline
to add the text to your project.
It is recommended to keep your text within the title safe area. The title safe area is the rectangular box on
the Preview Window. By keeping the text within the bounds of the title safe area, the whole text will not
be truncated when viewed on a TV screen. You can display or hide the title safe area by selecting
File: Preferences - General tab - Display title safe area on Preview Window.

Adding preset text to your project
The Library contains various preset text that you can use for your projects. To use these preset text,
select Title in the
Gallery list then drag the preset text onto the Title Track.

Inserting subtitles to your project
You can use your own movie subtitle files for your project. To insert your own, click Open Subtitle File.
In the Open dialog box, locate the file you want to use and the target track and click
Open.

Note: To open subtitles with non-English characters, select the appropriate option in
Language.
You may choose to place your titles on separate title tracks by selecting from the Import: to title track
number drop-down menu. To edit its text attributes, select the Font, Font size, Font color, Line leading
and Glow shadow for your subtitles. You can also choose
Vertical text to set the text orientation to vertical.

Saving subtitle files
Page 410

Saving movie subtitles allows you to reuse them in the future. Click Save Subtitle File to open the Save
As dialog box. Locate where to save your movie subtitle and the source track and click
Save.
Notes:
· Movie subtitles will automatically be saved as *.utf files.
· To save subtitles in foreign languages like Chinese, Japanese or Greek, click Open Subtitle File in the
Options Panel and browse for the particular file. Before you open the file, however, make sure you select
the corresponding language in
Language.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 411

Title > Editing text > Rotating text

Editing text
For single titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window.
For multiple titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window, then click the text
that you want to edit.
Notes:
· Once a title clip has been inserted onto the Timeline, you can adjust its duration by either dragging the
handles of the clip, or entering a
Duration value in the Options Panel.
· To see how the title appears on the underlying video clip, select the title clip and then click Play
Trimmed Clip or drag the
Jog Slider.
Tip: When you are creating multiple title clips that share the same attributes such as font type and style, it
is a good rule of thumb to store one copy of your title clip in the Library. (Just drag and drop the title clip
from the Timeline into the Library.) This way, you can easily duplicate the title clip (by dragging it from
the Library back onto the Title Track) and then change the title.

Modifying text attributes
Modify the attributes of your text, such as font face, style, size, and more, by using the available settings
in the Options Panel.
More options allow you to set the style and alignment, apply a Border, Shadow and Transparency and
add a
Text backdrop to your text.
A text backdrop superimposes your text on an ellipse, rounded rectangle, curve-edged rectangle and a
rectangle color bar. Click
to open the
Text Backdrop dialog box to select whether to use a solid or gradient color and to set the transparency
of the text backdrop.

In the Preview Window, click the text box you want to rearrange. After selecting, right-click it then on
the menu that opens, select how you want to restack the text.

Repositioning a text in a multiple-title clip

Page 412

Rotating text
Using the purple handles, you can rotate a text towards the position of your cursor in the Preview
Window. To rotate a text, make sure that you have selected a text to display the yellow and purple
handles. In the Preview Window, click and drag a purple handle to the position you want.
You can also specify a value in
Rotate by degree of the Options Panel to apply a more precise angle of rotation.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 413

Title > Editing text > Rotating text

Editing text
For single titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window.
For multiple titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window, then click the text
that you want to edit.
Notes:
· Once a title clip has been inserted onto the Timeline, you can adjust its duration by either dragging the
handles of the clip, or entering a
Duration value in the Options Panel.
· To see how the title appears on the underlying video clip, select the title clip and then click Play
Trimmed Clip or drag the
Jog Slider.
Tip: When you are creating multiple title clips that share the same attributes such as font type and style, it
is a good rule of thumb to store one copy of your title clip in the Library. (Just drag and drop the title clip
from the Timeline into the Library.) This way, you can easily duplicate the title clip (by dragging it from
the Library back onto the Title Track) and then change the title.

Modifying text attributes
Modify the attributes of your text, such as font face, style, size, and more, by using the available settings
in the Options Panel.
More options allow you to set the style and alignment, apply a Border, Shadow and Transparency and
add a
Text backdrop to your text.
A text backdrop superimposes your text on an ellipse, rounded rectangle, curve-edged rectangle and a
rectangle color bar. Click
to open the
Text Backdrop dialog box to select whether to use a solid or gradient color and to set the transparency
of the text backdrop.

In the Preview Window, click the text box you want to rearrange. After selecting, right-click it then on
the menu that opens, select how you want to restack the text.

Repositioning a text in a multiple-title clip

Page 414

Rotating text
Using the purple handles, you can rotate a text towards the position of your cursor in the Preview
Window. To rotate a text, make sure that you have selected a text to display the yellow and purple
handles. In the Preview Window, click and drag a purple handle to the position you want.
You can also specify a value in
Rotate by degree of the Options Panel to apply a more precise angle of rotation.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 415

Title > Editing text > Rotating text

Editing text
For single titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window.
For multiple titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window, then click the text
that you want to edit.
Notes:
· Once a title clip has been inserted onto the Timeline, you can adjust its duration by either dragging the
handles of the clip, or entering a
Duration value in the Options Panel.
· To see how the title appears on the underlying video clip, select the title clip and then click Play
Trimmed Clip or drag the
Jog Slider.
Tip: When you are creating multiple title clips that share the same attributes such as font type and style, it
is a good rule of thumb to store one copy of your title clip in the Library. (Just drag and drop the title clip
from the Timeline into the Library.) This way, you can easily duplicate the title clip (by dragging it from
the Library back onto the Title Track) and then change the title.

Modifying text attributes
Modify the attributes of your text, such as font face, style, size, and more, by using the available settings
in the Options Panel.
More options allow you to set the style and alignment, apply a Border, Shadow and Transparency and
add a
Text backdrop to your text.
A text backdrop superimposes your text on an ellipse, rounded rectangle, curve-edged rectangle and a
rectangle color bar. Click
to open the
Text Backdrop dialog box to select whether to use a solid or gradient color and to set the transparency
of the text backdrop.

In the Preview Window, click the text box you want to rearrange. After selecting, right-click it then on
the menu that opens, select how you want to restack the text.

Repositioning a text in a multiple-title clip

Page 416

Rotating text
Using the purple handles, you can rotate a text towards the position of your cursor in the Preview
Window. To rotate a text, make sure that you have selected a text to display the yellow and purple
handles. In the Preview Window, click and drag a purple handle to the position you want.
You can also specify a value in
Rotate by degree of the Options Panel to apply a more precise angle of rotation.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 417

Title > Editing text > Rotating text

Editing text
For single titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window.
For multiple titles, select the title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window, then click the text
that you want to edit.
Notes:
· Once a title clip has been inserted onto the Timeline, you can adjust its duration by either dragging the
handles of the clip, or entering a
Duration value in the Options Panel.
· To see how the title appears on the underlying video clip, select the title clip and then click Play
Trimmed Clip or drag the
Jog Slider.
Tip: When you are creating multiple title clips that share the same attributes such as font type and style, it
is a good rule of thumb to store one copy of your title clip in the Library. (Just drag and drop the title clip
from the Timeline into the Library.) This way, you can easily duplicate the title clip (by dragging it from
the Library back onto the Title Track) and then change the title.

Modifying text attributes
Modify the attributes of your text, such as font face, style, size, and more, by using the available settings
in the Options Panel.
More options allow you to set the style and alignment, apply a Border, Shadow and Transparency and
add a
Text backdrop to your text.
A text backdrop superimposes your text on an ellipse, rounded rectangle, curve-edged rectangle and a
rectangle color bar. Click
to open the
Text Backdrop dialog box to select whether to use a solid or gradient color and to set the transparency
of the text backdrop.

In the Preview Window, click the text box you want to rearrange. After selecting, right-click it then on
the menu that opens, select how you want to restack the text.

Repositioning a text in a multiple-title clip

Page 418

Rotating text
Using the purple handles, you can rotate a text towards the position of your cursor in the Preview
Window. To rotate a text, make sure that you have selected a text to display the yellow and purple
handles. In the Preview Window, click and drag a purple handle to the position you want.
You can also specify a value in
Rotate by degree of the Options Panel to apply a more precise angle of rotation.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 419

Title > Applying animation

Applying animation
Apply motion to your text with VideoStudio's text animation tools such as Fade, Moving Path, and
Drop.

To apply animation to the current text:
1 In the Animation tab, select
Apply animation.
2 Select the animation category to use in
Type.
3 Select a preset animation from the box under
Type.
Tip: Click
to open a dialog box where you can specify animation attributes.
4 Drag the
Pause duration handles to specify how long the text will pause after it enters and before it exits the
screen.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 420

Title > Saving your titles to the Library

Saving your titles to the Library
If you still intend to use the title you have created for other projects, it is recommended that you save it in
the Library. Simply select a title on the Timeline and drag it to the Library.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 421

Audio

Audio
Sounds are one of the elements that determine the success of your video production. VideoStudio's
Audio Step allows you to add both narration and music to your project.
The Audio Step consists of two tracks: Voice and Music. Insert your narrations on the Voice Track and
your background music or sound effects on the Music Track
.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 422

Audio > The Audio Step Options Panel

The Audio Step Options Panel
The Audio Step Options Panel consists of two tabs: Music & Voice tab and
Auto Music tab. The Music & Voice tab allows you to copy music from your audio CD, record your
voice and apply audio filters to your audio tracks. The Auto Music tab allows you to use third-party
music tracks for your project.
Music & Voice tab Duration: Displays the duration of the audio track in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
You can also pre-set the length of the recording by entering the desired duration. Clip volume: Adjusts
the volume level of the recorded clip. Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of the clip. Fade-out:
Gradually decreases the volume of the clip. Record Voice: Opens the Adjust Volume dialog box where
you can first test the volume of your microphone. Click Start to begin recording. VideoStudio creates a
new clip to the right of the existing audio in the Voice Track on the Timeline. This changes into Stop
during the recording process. Import from Audio CD: Opens a dialog box where you can import music
tracks from an audio CD. Click to update your CD information either from the CD-text in the audio
CD or from the Internet. Playback Speed: Opens a dialog box where you can change the speed and
duration of an audio clip. Audio Filter: Opens the Audio Filter dialog box where you can apply audio
filters to the selected audio clip. Audio View: Changes your Timeline into an audio waveform. When
clicked, the Surround Sound Mixer tab is displayed.
Auto Music tab Duration: Displays the total duration of the selected music. Clip volume: Adjusts the
volume level of the selected music. A value of 100 retains the music's original volume level. Fade-in:
Gradually increases the volume of the music. Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of the music.
Scope: Specify how the program will search for SmartSound files. Local: Searches for SmartSound files
stored in the hard drive. Mounted: Searches for SmartSound files stored in the hard drive and CD-ROM
drives. Owned: Searches for SmartSound files that you own including those stored in CDs. All: Searches
for all SmartSound files available in your desktop computer and the Internet. Library: Lists the available
libraries from which music can be imported. Music: Select the desired music to add to your project.
Variation: Select from a variety of musical instruments and tempo to apply to the selected music. Play
Selected Music: Plays back the music with the selected Variation. Add to Timeline: Inserts the selected
track to the Music Track of the Timeline. Auto trim: Automatically trims the audio clip to fit the empty
space based on the Jog Slider position. SmartSound Quicktracks: Opens a dialog box where you can
view information and manage the SmartSound Library.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 423

Audio > Adding audio files > Adding third-party music

Adding audio files
VideoStudio provides a separate Voice Track and Music Track but you may interchangeably insert
voice and music files on either track. To insert, click
and select
Insert Audio. Choose which track to insert your audio file.
Tip: Click
Audio View for easier editing of your audio clips.
The VideoStudio DVD also comes with several audio clips ready for your use. Click Load audio
to add them to the Library for easy access.

Adding voiceover narration
Documentaries and news features often use narrations to help the audience understand what is going on
in the video. VideoStudio allows you to record your own narration with crisp and clear results.

To add voiceover narration:
1 Click the
Music & Voice tab.
2 Move to the section of the video where you want to insert your narration by using the
Jog Slider.
Note:
You cannot record over an existing clip. When a clip is selected, recording is disabled. Make sure that a
clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area on the Timeline.
3 Click Record Voice. The Adjust Volume
dialog box appears.
4 Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. Use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the volume of the microphone.
5 Click
Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
6 Press [Esc] or click
Stop to end recording.
Tip: The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This makes it
easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select the clip on the Timeline
and press
[Delete].

Adding background music
Set the feel of your movie with the background music of your choice. VideoStudio can record and
convert song tracks from your CD into WAV files and then insert them onto the Timeline.
VideoStudio also supports WMA, AVI, and other popular audio file formats which you can directly
insert onto the Music Track.

Page 424

Importing music from an audio CD
Capture music by importing from an audio CD. VideoStudio copies the CDA audio file then saves it in
your hard drive as a WAV file.

To import music from an audio CD:
1 Click Import from Audio CD in the Music & Voice tab to open the Rip CD Audio dialog box. To
check if the disc is detected, see to it that
Audio drive is enabled.
2 Select the tracks to be imported in the
Track List.
3 Click
Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4 Click
Rip to start importing the audio tracks.

Adding third-party music
VideoStudio's
Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality sound tracks from royalty-free music and use
them as background music in your project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument
variations per music.
Note: Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in sound track
creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To add third-party music:
1 Click the
Auto Music tab.
2 Select how the program will search for music files in
Scope.
3 Select the Library
from where to import the music.
4 Under
Music, select the music you want to use.
5 Select a Variation of the selected music. Click
Play Selected Music to play back the music with the variation applied.
6 Set the Volume level then click
Add to Timeline.
Tip: Select Auto trim
to automatically trim the audio clip to fit the empty space based on the Jog Slider position.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 425

Audio > Adding audio files > Adding third-party music

Adding audio files
VideoStudio provides a separate Voice Track and Music Track but you may interchangeably insert
voice and music files on either track. To insert, click
and select
Insert Audio. Choose which track to insert your audio file.
Tip: Click
Audio View for easier editing of your audio clips.
The VideoStudio DVD also comes with several audio clips ready for your use. Click Load audio
to add them to the Library for easy access.

Adding voiceover narration
Documentaries and news features often use narrations to help the audience understand what is going on
in the video. VideoStudio allows you to record your own narration with crisp and clear results.

To add voiceover narration:
1 Click the
Music & Voice tab.
2 Move to the section of the video where you want to insert your narration by using the
Jog Slider.
Note:
You cannot record over an existing clip. When a clip is selected, recording is disabled. Make sure that a
clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area on the Timeline.
3 Click Record Voice. The Adjust Volume
dialog box appears.
4 Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. Use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the volume of the microphone.
5 Click
Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
6 Press [Esc] or click
Stop to end recording.
Tip: The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This makes it
easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select the clip on the Timeline
and press
[Delete].

Adding background music
Set the feel of your movie with the background music of your choice. VideoStudio can record and
convert song tracks from your CD into WAV files and then insert them onto the Timeline.
VideoStudio also supports WMA, AVI, and other popular audio file formats which you can directly
insert onto the Music Track.

Page 426

Importing music from an audio CD
Capture music by importing from an audio CD. VideoStudio copies the CDA audio file then saves it in
your hard drive as a WAV file.

To import music from an audio CD:
1 Click Import from Audio CD in the Music & Voice tab to open the Rip CD Audio dialog box. To
check if the disc is detected, see to it that
Audio drive is enabled.
2 Select the tracks to be imported in the
Track List.
3 Click
Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4 Click
Rip to start importing the audio tracks.

Adding third-party music
VideoStudio's
Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality sound tracks from royalty-free music and use
them as background music in your project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument
variations per music.
Note: Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in sound track
creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To add third-party music:
1 Click the
Auto Music tab.
2 Select how the program will search for music files in
Scope.
3 Select the Library
from where to import the music.
4 Under
Music, select the music you want to use.
5 Select a Variation of the selected music. Click
Play Selected Music to play back the music with the variation applied.
6 Set the Volume level then click
Add to Timeline.
Tip: Select Auto trim
to automatically trim the audio clip to fit the empty space based on the Jog Slider position.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 427

Audio > Adding audio files > Adding third-party music

Adding audio files
VideoStudio provides a separate Voice Track and Music Track but you may interchangeably insert
voice and music files on either track. To insert, click
and select
Insert Audio. Choose which track to insert your audio file.
Tip: Click
Audio View for easier editing of your audio clips.
The VideoStudio DVD also comes with several audio clips ready for your use. Click Load audio
to add them to the Library for easy access.

Adding voiceover narration
Documentaries and news features often use narrations to help the audience understand what is going on
in the video. VideoStudio allows you to record your own narration with crisp and clear results.

To add voiceover narration:
1 Click the
Music & Voice tab.
2 Move to the section of the video where you want to insert your narration by using the
Jog Slider.
Note:
You cannot record over an existing clip. When a clip is selected, recording is disabled. Make sure that a
clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area on the Timeline.
3 Click Record Voice. The Adjust Volume
dialog box appears.
4 Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. Use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the volume of the microphone.
5 Click
Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
6 Press [Esc] or click
Stop to end recording.
Tip: The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This makes it
easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select the clip on the Timeline
and press
[Delete].

Adding background music
Set the feel of your movie with the background music of your choice. VideoStudio can record and
convert song tracks from your CD into WAV files and then insert them onto the Timeline.
VideoStudio also supports WMA, AVI, and other popular audio file formats which you can directly
insert onto the Music Track.

Page 428

Importing music from an audio CD
Capture music by importing from an audio CD. VideoStudio copies the CDA audio file then saves it in
your hard drive as a WAV file.

To import music from an audio CD:
1 Click Import from Audio CD in the Music & Voice tab to open the Rip CD Audio dialog box. To
check if the disc is detected, see to it that
Audio drive is enabled.
2 Select the tracks to be imported in the
Track List.
3 Click
Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4 Click
Rip to start importing the audio tracks.

Adding third-party music
VideoStudio's
Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality sound tracks from royalty-free music and use
them as background music in your project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument
variations per music.
Note: Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in sound track
creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To add third-party music:
1 Click the
Auto Music tab.
2 Select how the program will search for music files in
Scope.
3 Select the Library
from where to import the music.
4 Under
Music, select the music you want to use.
5 Select a Variation of the selected music. Click
Play Selected Music to play back the music with the variation applied.
6 Set the Volume level then click
Add to Timeline.
Tip: Select Auto trim
to automatically trim the audio clip to fit the empty space based on the Jog Slider position.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 429

Audio > Adding audio files > Adding third-party music

Adding audio files
VideoStudio provides a separate Voice Track and Music Track but you may interchangeably insert
voice and music files on either track. To insert, click
and select
Insert Audio. Choose which track to insert your audio file.
Tip: Click
Audio View for easier editing of your audio clips.
The VideoStudio DVD also comes with several audio clips ready for your use. Click Load audio
to add them to the Library for easy access.

Adding voiceover narration
Documentaries and news features often use narrations to help the audience understand what is going on
in the video. VideoStudio allows you to record your own narration with crisp and clear results.

To add voiceover narration:
1 Click the
Music & Voice tab.
2 Move to the section of the video where you want to insert your narration by using the
Jog Slider.
Note:
You cannot record over an existing clip. When a clip is selected, recording is disabled. Make sure that a
clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area on the Timeline.
3 Click Record Voice. The Adjust Volume
dialog box appears.
4 Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. Use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the volume of the microphone.
5 Click
Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
6 Press [Esc] or click
Stop to end recording.
Tip: The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This makes it
easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select the clip on the Timeline
and press
[Delete].

Adding background music
Set the feel of your movie with the background music of your choice. VideoStudio can record and
convert song tracks from your CD into WAV files and then insert them onto the Timeline.
VideoStudio also supports WMA, AVI, and other popular audio file formats which you can directly
insert onto the Music Track.

Page 430

Importing music from an audio CD
Capture music by importing from an audio CD. VideoStudio copies the CDA audio file then saves it in
your hard drive as a WAV file.

To import music from an audio CD:
1 Click Import from Audio CD in the Music & Voice tab to open the Rip CD Audio dialog box. To
check if the disc is detected, see to it that
Audio drive is enabled.
2 Select the tracks to be imported in the
Track List.
3 Click
Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4 Click
Rip to start importing the audio tracks.

Adding third-party music
VideoStudio's
Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality sound tracks from royalty-free music and use
them as background music in your project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument
variations per music.
Note: Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in sound track
creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To add third-party music:
1 Click the
Auto Music tab.
2 Select how the program will search for music files in
Scope.
3 Select the Library
from where to import the music.
4 Under
Music, select the music you want to use.
5 Select a Variation of the selected music. Click
Play Selected Music to play back the music with the variation applied.
6 Set the Volume level then click
Add to Timeline.
Tip: Select Auto trim
to automatically trim the audio clip to fit the empty space based on the Jog Slider position.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 431

Audio > Adding audio files > Adding third-party music

Adding audio files
VideoStudio provides a separate Voice Track and Music Track but you may interchangeably insert
voice and music files on either track. To insert, click
and select
Insert Audio. Choose which track to insert your audio file.
Tip: Click
Audio View for easier editing of your audio clips.
The VideoStudio DVD also comes with several audio clips ready for your use. Click Load audio
to add them to the Library for easy access.

Adding voiceover narration
Documentaries and news features often use narrations to help the audience understand what is going on
in the video. VideoStudio allows you to record your own narration with crisp and clear results.

To add voiceover narration:
1 Click the
Music & Voice tab.
2 Move to the section of the video where you want to insert your narration by using the
Jog Slider.
Note:
You cannot record over an existing clip. When a clip is selected, recording is disabled. Make sure that a
clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area on the Timeline.
3 Click Record Voice. The Adjust Volume
dialog box appears.
4 Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. Use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the volume of the microphone.
5 Click
Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
6 Press [Esc] or click
Stop to end recording.
Tip: The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This makes it
easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select the clip on the Timeline
and press
[Delete].

Adding background music
Set the feel of your movie with the background music of your choice. VideoStudio can record and
convert song tracks from your CD into WAV files and then insert them onto the Timeline.
VideoStudio also supports WMA, AVI, and other popular audio file formats which you can directly
insert onto the Music Track.

Page 432

Importing music from an audio CD
Capture music by importing from an audio CD. VideoStudio copies the CDA audio file then saves it in
your hard drive as a WAV file.

To import music from an audio CD:
1 Click Import from Audio CD in the Music & Voice tab to open the Rip CD Audio dialog box. To
check if the disc is detected, see to it that
Audio drive is enabled.
2 Select the tracks to be imported in the
Track List.
3 Click
Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4 Click
Rip to start importing the audio tracks.

Adding third-party music
VideoStudio's
Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality sound tracks from royalty-free music and use
them as background music in your project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument
variations per music.
Note: Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in sound track
creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To add third-party music:
1 Click the
Auto Music tab.
2 Select how the program will search for music files in
Scope.
3 Select the Library
from where to import the music.
4 Under
Music, select the music you want to use.
5 Select a Variation of the selected music. Click
Play Selected Music to play back the music with the variation applied.
6 Set the Volume level then click
Add to Timeline.
Tip: Select Auto trim
to automatically trim the audio clip to fit the empty space based on the Jog Slider position.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 433

Audio > Using the C lip Volume C ontrol

Using the Clip Volume Control
You will find the volume control in the Attribute Panel. Clip volume represents the percentage of the
original recorded volume. Values range from 0 to 500%, where 0% completely silences the clip and 100
% retains the original recorded volume.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 434

Audio > Trimming and cutting audio clips

Trimming and cutting audio clips
After recording voice and music, you can easily trim your audio clips on the Timeline. There are two
ways to trim audio clips: On the Timeline, a selected audio clip has two handles that can be used for
trimming. Just grab a handle, either from the beginning or end, and drag it to shorten a clip.

Drag the Trim handles.

Tip: You can also trim a clip in the Library by using the Trim handles.
To play the trimmed portion of the clip, click
Play Trimmed Clip.
Aside from trimming, you can also cut audio clips. Drag the Jog Slider to the position where you want to
cut the audio clip then click
Cut clip starting from Jog Slider's position. You can then delete the excess part of the clip.

Tips:
· Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a specific timecode. It
appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the timeline, enabling you to make adjustments
based on the timecode shown.
· The instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:11.03 (03.06 - 09.22). 00:00:11.03 indicates
the current timecode where the selected clip is located. 03.06 represents the duration overlapping with
the previous clip while 09.22 is the duration overlapping with the next clip.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 435

Audio > Stretching audio duration

Stretching audio duration
The time stretch feature allows you to stretch an audio clip without distorting its pitch. Normally,
stretching audio clips to fit the project results in a distorted sound. The time stretch feature will make the
audio clip sound like it is just played in a slower tempo.
Note:
When you stretch an audio clip by 50-150%, the sound will not be distorted. However, if stretched
below or above that range, the sound may be distorted.

To stretch the duration of an audio clip:
1 Click the Music & Voice tab in the
Options Panel.
2 Click Playback Speed to open the
Playback Speed dialog box.
3 Enter a value in
Speed or drag the slider to change the speed of the audio clip. A slower speed makes the clip's duration
longer while a faster speed makes it shorter.
Tips:
· You can specify how long the clip will play in
Time stretch duration. The speed of the clip will automatically adjust to the specified duration. This
feature will not trim the clip when you specify a shorter time.
· You can stretch the time of an audio clip on the Timeline by holding
[Shift] then dragging the handles on the selected clip.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 436

Audio > Fade-in/out

Fade-in/out
Background music that starts and ends gradually is commonly used to create smooth transitions. For
each of your music clips, you can click
and
to fade-in and fade-out the volume at the start and end of the clip.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 437

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 438

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 439

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 440

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 441

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 442

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 443

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 444

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 445

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 446

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 447

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 448

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 449

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 450

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 451

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 452

Audio > Mixing audio tracks > Volume rubber banding

Mixing audio tracks
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips blend well
together is to control the volume of your clips. Blend the different audio tracks in your project by using
the Audio Step Options Panel, Surround Sound Mixer or
Audio View.

Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five separate audio
channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one sub-woofer frequency effect.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener, outputting audio
through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this mixer to adjust the volume for
stereo file, making it sound as if the audio moves from one speaker to another and creating a "surround
sound" effect.

Adjusting stereo channels
Stereo files (two channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels accordingly.

To use stereo mode:
1 Click Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar. Select
Music Track in the Options Panel.
Tip: To check if the 5.1 Surround is disabled, click Audio View in the
Toolbar.
2 Click Play in the
Options Panel.
3 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to either right or left,
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will amplify the sound coming from your preferred direction.
4 Drag
Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.

Page 453

Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the stereo
configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls. Six-channel VU Meter: Front Left, Front
Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left, Surround Right. Center: Controls the amount of output sound
from the center speaker. Sub-woofer: Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
Tip: Sub-woofer sound is less directional than sound output from the satellite speakers. Therefore, you
can put it anywhere in the room after some experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so
there are no fixed rules.

To use Surround Sound mode:
1 Click
Enable/Disable 5.1 Surround in the Toolbar.
2 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. This time, drag it to any of the
six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and
2 in using stereo mode.
3 Drag the Volume, Center and
Sub-woofer to adjust sound controls of your audio
Tip: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video, Overlay and Voice. To
do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to
3.

Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them in different
channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.

For example, the voice is on the left audio channel and the background music on the right. When you
duplicate the right channel, it will mute the vocal part of the song leaving the background music to play.
To duplicate an audio channel, select Duplicate audio channel in the Attribute tab in the
Options Panel then select which audio channel to duplicate.

Volume rubber banding
The volume rubber band is the horizontal line in the middle of the track and can only be seen when you
are in Audio View. You can use the rubber band to adjust the volume of the audio track of video clip
and the audio clips in the Music and Voice
Tracks.

To adjust the volume level using the rubber band:

Page 454

1 Click
Audio View.
2 On the Timeline, click the track to be adjusted.

3 Click a point on the rubber band to add a key frame. This allows you to adjust the volume level of the
track based on this key frame.

4 Drag the key frame upwards/downwards to increase/decrease the volume level at this point of the clip.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to the rubber band and to adjust the volume level.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 455

Audio > Applying audio filters

Applying audio filters
VideoStudio allows you to apply filters such as Amplify, Hiss Reduction, Long Echo, Normalize, Pitch
Shift, Remove Noise, Reverb, Stadium, Vocal Reduction and Volume Leveling to your audio clips in the
Music and Voice Tracks. You can only apply audio filters when you are in Timeline View
.

To apply audio filters:
1 Click
Timeline View.
2 Select the audio clip on which to apply an audio filter.
3 In the Music and Voice Panel, click Audio Filter. This opens the
Audio Filter dialog box.
In the Available filters list, select the desired audio filters and click
Add.

Note: An audio filter can be customized if the
Options button is enabled. Click Options to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the
particular audio filter.
4 Click
OK.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 456

Share

Share
Render your project into a video file format that is suitable for your audience or purpose. You can export
the rendered video file as a Web page, multimedia greeting card, or send it to a friend by e-mail. All
these and more can be done in VideoStudio's
Share Step.
A DVD authoring wizard is also integrated in this step, enabling you to directly burn your project as
AVCHD, DVD, VCD, SVCD and BDMV.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 457

Share > The Share Step Options Panel

The Share Step Options Panel Create Video File: Creates a
video file of your project with your specified project settings. Create Sound File: Allows you to save the
audio segment of your project as a sound file. Create Disc: Invokes the DVD authoring wizard and
allows you to choose an option from a pop-up menu to burn your project in AVCHD, DVD, VCD,
SVCD or BDMV format. Export to Mobile Device: A video file can be exported to other external
devices such as PSP, Windows mobile-based devices and SD (Secure Digital) cards. You can only
export your project after you have created a video file. Project Playback: Clears the screen and displays
the whole project or a selected segment against a black background. It can also output to a videotape if
you have a VGA to a TV converter, camcorder, or a video recorder connected to your system. It also
allows you to manually control the output device when recording. DV Recording: Allows you to record a
selected video file onto a DV tape using a DV camcorder. HDV Recording: Allows you to record a
selected video file onto a DV tape using an HDV camcorder. Share Video Online: Allows you to output
your project as FLV files to upload to YouTube directly.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 458

Share > C reating movie templates

Creating movie templates
Movie templates contain settings which define how to create the final movie file. By using the preset
movie templates provided by Corel VideoStudio, or by creating your own templates in the
Make Movie Templates Manager, you can have multiple variations of your final movie. For instance, you
can create movie templates that provide high quality outputs for DVD and videotape recording, and also
set up movie templates that give lower quality but acceptable outputs for different purposes, such as Web
streaming and e-mail distribution.

To create movie templates:
1 Select Tools: Make Movie Templates Manager. The
Make Movie Templates Manager dialog box opens.
2 Click New. In the New Template dialog box, select the File format and type in a Template name.
Click
OK.
3 In the Template Options dialog box, set the options you want in the General and AVI/
Compression tabs.
Note: The available options in the tabs will depend on the type of file format of the template.
4 Click
OK.
Notes:
· Movie templates will appear in a selection menu when you click Create Video File in the Share Step. If
you do not want to use a movie template, you can select
Custom from the pop-up menu. This allows you to choose your own settings for creating the final movie
or simply use the current project settings.
· To modify the settings of a movie template, click Edit in the
Make Movie Templates Manager dialog box.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 459

Share > Optimizing MPEG videos

Optimizing MPEG videos
VideoStudio's
MPEG Optimizer makes creating and rendering movies in MPEG format a lot faster.
It analyzes and finds the best MPEG settings or the
Optimal project settings profile to use for your project. In doing so, it saves time by keeping your
project's original segments with settings compatible to the Optimal project settings profile and maintains
high quality for all segments including the ones that need re-encoding or re-rendering. As an additional
feature, you can now specify the file size of your output to comply with file size limitations for your
project.
After selecting MPEG Optimizer in the Share Step Options Panel, VideoStudio displays the
MPEG Optimizer dialog box and shows what percentage of your project needs to be re-rendered.
The MPEG Optimizer automatically detects changes in your project and renders out only the edited
portions, making render time much shorter and faster.

To use MPEG Optimizer:
1 In the Share Step Options Panel, click Create Video File and select
MPEG Optimizer.
Notes:
· MPEG Optimizer is automatically enabled when an MPEG movie template is selected.
· To stop showing MPEG Optimizer dialog box when selecting MPEG movie templates, deselect Show
MPEG Optimizer dialog box in
Preferences: General.
2 The
MPEG Optimizer dialog box appears.

3 Enter your desired file size output. Video and Audio Settings automatically adjust to your specified file
size.
4 Click

Page 460

Accept.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 461

Share > C reating and saving a video file

Creating and saving a video file
Before rendering your entire project into a movie file, select File: Save or
Save As to save it first as a VideoStudio project file (*.VSP). This allows you to return to your project
anytime and make edits.
If you want to preview your project before creating a movie file, switch to Project Mode and click Play
in the Navigation Panel. How the project is played back depends on the option you have selected in
File: Preferences - General tab - Playback method.
Note: You can click
Pause in the progress bar to stop rendering and continue it when you're ready. You can also choose to
stop preview while rendering for a faster and more efficient rendering of your project.

To create a video file of the entire project:
1 Click
Create Video File in the Options Panel. A selection menu of movie templates then opens.

2 To create a movie file using the current project settings, select
Same as Project Settings.
Or, select one of the preset movie templates. These templates let you create a movie file that is suitable
for the Web or for output to DV, DVD, SVCD or VCD, WMV and MPEG-4.
Note: To check current project settings, select File: Project Properties. To check the saving options
provided by a movie template, select
Tools: Make Movie Templates Manager.
You can also use the settings of the first video clip in the Video Track by selecting
Same as First Video Clip.
3 Enter the desired file name for your movie and click Save. The movie file will then be saved and placed
in the
Video Library.
Tip: To save on rendering time, use the same settings for your source video (e.g. captured video),

Page 462

VideoStudio project, and movie template.
You can also render your project partially. SmartRender
allows "changes only" rendering, eliminating the need to re-render an entire video sequence when slight
modifications have been made.

To create a video file of the preview range:
1 Click the ruler on top of the Timeline to make sure no clip is selected.
2 Select a preview range using the Trim Handles. Or, drag the triangle along the ruler then press [F3]
and
[F4] to mark the start and end points respectively.

Note: A red line representing the selected range should appear on the ruler.
3 Click
Create Video File in the Options Panel.
4 Select a movie template.
5 In the Create Video File dialog box, click Options. In the Options dialog box, select Preview range.
Click
OK.
6 Enter a file name and click
Save.
Another method of partially rendering your project is to click Play-Project while holding down the [Shift]
key. You don't have to be in the Share Step to do this. The selected range will be rendered then shown
in the Preview Window. Doing this will create a temporary video file under the folder specified in the
Preview tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 463

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 464

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 465

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 466

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 467

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 468

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 469

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 470

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 471

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 472

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 473

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 474

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 475

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 476

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 477

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 478

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 479

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 480

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 481

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 482

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 483

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 484

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 485

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 486

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 487

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 488

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 489

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 490

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 491

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 492

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 493

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 494

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 495

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 496

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 497

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 498

Share > Burning video discs > Burning your project onto a disc

Burning video discs
Click
Create Disc in the Options Panel to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or
videos) to create an AVCHD, Blu-ray, DVD, VCD or SVCD.
In the dialog box that opens, first choose an output format. Second, decide whether you want to add
other projects and videos. See the following sections for more information.

Notes:
· Your entire VideoStudio project can be brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning even if you
did not save it first as a *.vsp file.
· Video will be adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in the Disc Templates Manager dialog
box), and automatically letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the correct aspect ratio.

Assembling files
Import videos or VideoStudio project files (*.vsp) you want to include in your final movie.

To add videos:
1 Click
Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are, and then select one or more video clips you

Page 499

want to add.

2 Click
Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, sometimes you may see a black thumbnail. This
is because the first scene (frame) of this video clip is a black screen. To change it, double-click to select
this video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene you want. Next, right-click the thumbnail and select
Change Thumbnail
.

To add VideoStudio projects:
1 Click
Add VideoStudio project files.
Locate the folder where the projects are, and then select one or more video projects you want to add.

2 Click
Open.
You can trim a video and VideoStudio project using the
Jog Slider, mark-in/out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Tip:
You can also add videos from DVD/DVD-VR discs.

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when the
Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters, you can create submenus linked to their associated
video clip.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video clip. When
viewers click on a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected chapter.

Page 500

Notes:
· You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
· If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step immediately without
creating any menus after clicking
Next.
· When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio project or one video clip, do not select
Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:
1 Select a video in the Media Clip
List.
2 Click
Add/Edit Chapter.
3 Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene to set it as a chapter then click Add Chapter. Or, click
Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio automatically select chapters.
Tips:
· If you want to use
Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or the video has scene change
information.
· If you click Auto
Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured from a DV camcorder, Corel
VideoStudio can automatically detect scene changes and add chapters accordingly.
· If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, Corel VideoStudio automatically
generates these chapters for you when you click
Auto Add Chapters.
4 Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points. You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All
Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.
5 Click
OK.

Creating selection menus
In this step, you can create the main menu and submenus. These menus provide an interactive screen for
your movie viewer to choose which video to watch. Corel VideoStudio includes a set of menu templates
for you to create your menus and submenus.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it will jump to
submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it so when you click Clip 2, the video
will start playing from the beginning.

Page 501

To edit menus:
1 By default, VideoStudio automatically makes all required menus for you. Use Currently displayed menu
to switch to the menu you want to edit.
2 In the Gallery tab, click Menu template category
and select a specific category. Click a particular template to apply.

3 Click
My Title to customize the menu heading. You can also click the text description under each video
thumbnail for customization.
Note:
If you do not modify "My Title" and the thumbnail descriptions or skip Step 2, there will be no menu
heading and thumbnail text in the final output.
4 In the Edit
tab, you can further customize your movie by adding background image, music or audio and by
modifying font properties.
Tips:
· Select Motion Menu
to enable motion attributes to the selected menu template.
· Click Layout Settings
to specify whether to apply layout to all pages of the menu, reset the page, or reset all pages of the
menu.
· Click Advanced Settings to specify whether to add a title menu, create a chapter menu, or display the
thumbnail numbers in the Chapter List
.
· Click Customize
to apply pan & zoom, motion filter and menu in and menu out effects.
5 When you're done, click
Preview to preview the movie.

Previewing
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks like before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the mouse
and click
Play to watch your movie and test the menu selection on your computer. Use the navigation controls here
as you would on a standard remote control of a home DVD player.

Page 502

Tip: As you move between controls, a tool tip pops up and tells you its specific function.

Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie onto a disc, your preferred
output or create a disc image file of your movie to save on your hard drive.

Tip: For details about the different disc formats, you can refer to
Appendix C: Technology Overview - AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD.

To burn your movie onto a disc:
1 Click
Next after you preview your project.
2 Click
Show more output options to show available options for your project.
· Select
Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their location.
· Select
Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later use.
· Select
Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during playback are prevented.
3 Click Burning Options
to define additional burner and output settings.
4 Click
Burn to start the burning process.
5 After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can select the next step.

Page 503

·
Close: Prompts you to save your work and close Corel VideoStudio.
Burning options
·
Disc burner: Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Label: Enables you to enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the CD/DVD.
·
Drive: Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
·
Copies: Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
·
Disc type: Displays the output disc format for the current project.
· Create to disc:
Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
·
Recording format: Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To quickly re-edit your
disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies
with the industry standard, and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD
players and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this format.
·
Create DVD folders: This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a DVD-Video. The
files created are in preparation for burning the video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the
finished DVD file on the computer using a DVD-Video player software.
·
Create disc image: Select this option if you plan to burn the video file several times. By selecting this
option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn the same video file.
· Normalize audio: Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of your movie. Different video
clips may have different audio recording levels when created. When these video clips are put together,
the volume could vary greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to assure a
balance audio level throughout the video.
·
Erase: Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
·
Burning Options: Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
·
Delete temp files: Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
·
Burn: Begins the recording process.
·
Required space: Serves as a reference in burning your projects. These indicators help determine if you
have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the disc.
·
Required/Available hard disk space: Displays the space needed by the working folder of the project and
the space available for use in the hard drive.
·
Required/Available disc space: Displays the space needed to fit the video file in the disc and the space
that is available for use.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some

Page 504

features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 505

Share > Playing back your project

Playing back your project
Project Playback is used to output your entire project or part of it to a DV camcorder. This also gives
you an actual size preview of your movie using the entire screen of either a PC or TV monitor. You can
only output your project on a DV camcorder if your project is using a DV AVI template. How your
video is played back will depend on the Playback method option that you selected in
Preferences.

To play back your project in actual size:
1 In the Options Panel, click
Project Playback.
2 In the Project Playback - Options dialog box, click Finish. To stop the play back, press
[Esc].
Note: If you only want to output the preview range of your project to the monitor, select
Preview range.

To record your project to a DV camcorder:
1 Turn on your DV camcorder and set it to
Play (VTR/VCR) mode.
2 In the Options Panel, click
Project Playback.
3 In the Project Playback - Options dialog box, select Use device control then click
Next.

Note: If you only want to output the preview range of your project to the DV camcorder, select
Preview range.
4 In the Project Playback - Device Control dialog box, use the
Navigation Panel to go to the section of the DV tape where to start recording your project.

Page 506

Tip: Click
Transmit to device unit for preview to preview your project on the DV camcorder's LCD monitor.
5 Click Record. When recording is complete, click
Finish.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 507

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 508

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 509

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 510

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 511

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 512

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 513

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 514

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 515

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 516

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 517

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 518

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 519

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 520

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 521

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 522

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 523

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 524

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 525

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 526

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 527

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 528

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 529

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 530

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 531

Share > Exporting your movie > Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver

Exporting your movie
VideoStudio provides you with a number of ways to export and share your movie, which will be
discussed in the following sections.

Export to mobile device
A video file can be exported to other external devices such as Windows mobile-based devices such as
Mobile phones, Smartphone, Pocket PC/PDA, PSP and iPod. You can only export your project after
you have created a video file.

To export to a mobile device:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click
Export to Mobile Device and select the video property.
3 In the
Save dialog box, type the file name and click the device where to export your movie.
4 Click
OK.

Output video file to a different medium
The Output the video file to a different medium
is only allowed after you create a final video file of your project or you select a video file that is in the
Library. You cannot export project files.

Posting your video on a Web page
The Internet is another medium where you can share your movies but there are a few things you need to
take into consideration. A short three minute video can take up 60MB of disk space and will take many
hours to download. However, at reasonable file sizes, viewers can download your movies from the
Internet. Creating video for the Internet requires proper use of video format and compression to produce
good quality but small file size video files.
After you have created a movie that is suitable for posting to the Internet, VideoStudio can assist with the
task of coding the HTML document.

To export your video onto a Web page:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Web Page.
3 A message will appear asking if you want to use
Microsoft ActiveMovie control or not.

Page 532

Note: ActiveMovie is a small plug-in for your Internet browser (standard with IE 4.0 or above) which
your viewers need to install. If you choose
No, the page will be set up with a simple link to the movie and will open your default media playback
application to view your video.
4 Enter a name and location for the new HTML file.
5 Click
OK.
Your default browser will open, displaying your page. When you upload this page to your Web server,
you need to change one line of code to reflect the relative links to the associated movie file.

Sending a movie by e-mail
When you select E-mail, VideoStudio automatically opens your default e-mail client and inserts the
selected video clip into a new message as an attachment. Enter the necessary information in the fields
then click
Send.
If your e-mail program was not previously configured as the default e-mail client, follow the instructions
below to set up your e-mail program. In MAPI-compliant programs such as Netscape Mail and Eudora,
you need to enable their MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) option.

To set up Microsoft Outlook Express as your default e-mail program:
1 In Outlook Express, select
Tools: Options.
2 Click the
General Tab in the Options dialog box.
3 Under Default Messaging Programs, click the Make Default button after the
This application is NOT the default Mail handler option.
4 Click
Apply.

To enable MAPI in Netscape Mail:
1 In Netscape Mail, select
Edit: Preferences.
2 Select
Mail & Newsgroups in the Category list.
3 Select
Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.
4 Click
OK.

To enable MAPI in Eudora:
1 In Eudora, select
Tools: Options.
2 Select MAPI in the
Category list.

Page 533

3 Select Always under
Use Eudora MAPI server.

Electronic greeting cards
Share your video with friends and relatives by creating multimedia greeting cards. VideoStudio packs the
movie into an executable (*.exe) file that automatically plays the video. In addition, you can even display
your video using your choice of background.

To create a greeting card:
1 Select a video clip from the Library.
Note: You cannot export DV AVI files as a greeting card.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
Greeting Card.

and select

3 Your video appears in a bounding box in the Multimedia Greeting Card dialog box. Double-click an
image from the
Background template to select it.
4 Drag the thumbnail to adjust the position. Another way is to enter X and Y axis values. You can also
resize the image using the black controls around the thumbnail, or enter Width and Height values directly.
5 Enter a file name for the card in the Greeting card file
entry box.
6 Click
OK to create the card.
The background templates that are provided with VideoStudio are JPEG image files. You can create
your own templates in any graphics editor, or even use still frames captured from your movies. To use
your own backgrounds, search for images using Browse next to the
Background template file name entry box.

Setting your video as your Movie Screen Saver
Personalize your desktop computer by creating your own video file then setting it as your screen saver.

Set a video as your desktop screen saver:
1 Select a WMV file from the Library.
2 Click Output video file to a different medium
and select
Movie Screen Saver. The Display Properties dialog box will appear with the video file as the selected

Page 534

screen saver.
3 Click
OK to apply the settings.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 535

Share > C reating an audio file

Creating an audio file
Sometimes, you want to save the audio track of your video project in a separate audio file. This is
especially useful when you want to use the same sound with another set of images, or when you want to
convert the audio of a captured live performance into sound files. VideoStudio makes it easy for you to
create an audio file of your project in MP4, MPA, WAV or WMA format.

To create an audio file:
1 Open your project and click the
Share Step.
Note: You can also create a sound file from an existing video file by selecting it in the Library.
2 Click
Create Sound File.
3 From the Save as type list, select the audio format you want to use and select Options to display the
Audio Save Options dialog box.
4 Fine tune your audio attributes and click
OK.
5 Enter a file name and click
Save.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 536

Share > Recording back to a DV camcorder

Recording back to a DV camcorder
After editing your project and creating a video file, VideoStudio allows you to record the video to your
DV camcorder. You can only record a video that is using DV AVI format to your DV camcorder.

To record a movie to your DV camcorder:
1 Turn your camcorder ON and set it to Play mode (or
VTR / VCR mode). See your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 Click the
Share Step.
3 Select a compatible DV AVI file from the Library.
4 Click
DV Recording.
5 The DV Recording - Preview Window dialog box opens. You can preview the video file here. After
you are done previewing, click
Next.
6 In the Project Playback - Record Window dialog box, use the
Navigation Panel to go to the section of the DV tape where to start recording.
Tip: Click
Transmit to device unit for preview to preview your project on the DV camcorder's LCD monitor.
7 Click Record. After you are done recording your project to the DV camcorder, click
Finish.
Note: Before recording a video file back to your DV camcorder, make sure the video is saved with the
correct codec. For example, the codec DV Video Encoder usually works well for most NTSC DV
camcorders. You can select it from the Compression tab in the
Video Save Options dialog box.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 537

Share > Recording back to an HDV camcorder

Recording back to an HDV camcorder
To record your finished project to an HDV/HD camcorder, you must first render it as
HDV/HD-encoded MPEG-2 transport stream file.

To record a movie to your HDV camcorder:
1 Turn your camcorder ON and set it to Play
/Edit mode. See your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2 In Share Step Options Panel, click
HDV Recording and select a transport stream template.
3 Enter a file name in
Create Video File dialog box.
4 VideoStudio renders the project. When done,
HDV Recording - Preview Window dialog box opens. You can preview the video file here.
5 Click
Next to start recording.
6 In the Project Playback - Record Window dialog box, use the
Navigation Panel to go to the section of the DV tape where to start recording.
Tip: Click
Transmit to device unit for preview to preview your project on the DV camcorder's LCD monitor.
7 Click Record. After you are done recording your project to the HDV camcorder, click
Finish.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 538

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes

Appendix A: Menus and
dialog boxes
Menus
Dialog boxes
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 539

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 540

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 541

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 542

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 543

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 544

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 545

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 546

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 547

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 548

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 549

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 550

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 551

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 552

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 553

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 554

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 555

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 556

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 557

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 558

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 559

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Menus > Help menu

Menus
File menu
· New Project: Creates a new Corel VideoStudio project file. This clears the existing workspace and
opens the new project with the specified settings in the New dialog box. If you have an unsaved project
opened in the workspace when you click
New Project, Corel VideoStudio prompts you to save the changes first.
·
Open Project: Invokes the Open dialog box for selecting a Corel VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) to
place in the workspace. If you have an unsaved project opened in the workspace, a message prompts
you to save the changes.
· Save/Save As: Allows you to save your work as a new or existing project file (*.vsp). It opens the
Save As dialog box where you can assign a file name and location for saving the file.
·
Smart Package: Allows you to back up all your media and project files you used in a project and compile
it in a specified folder.
· Project Properties: Displays the Project
Properties dialog box that includes information about the currently opened file. Here you can also edit the
project file template attributes.
· Preferences: Opens the
Preferences dialog box where you can customize the Corel VideoStudio working environment.
· Relink: Displays the Relink dialog box, prompting you to relink the currently selected clip whenever
necessary. If you move the folder containing the source files to another location, select
Smart search in the Relink dialog box. When you relink one thumbnail, Corel VideoStudio will relink all
the source files in the directory automatically.
·
Insert Media File to Timeline: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the appropriate track.
·
Insert Media File to Library: Displays a pop-up menu that allows you to select video, DVD/DVD-VR,
image, or audio, and then insert it to the Library.
·
Exit: Closes the Corel VideoStudio program. It displays a message, prompting you to save your current
project.

Edit menu
· Undo: Reverses past actions that you performed on your project. Corel VideoStudio allows you to go
back up to the last 99 actions. The number of steps that you can undo depends on the settings you
specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
· Redo: Allows you to reverse up to 99 of the last undo commands you performed. The number of steps

Page 560

you can redo depends on the settings you specify in the
File: Preferences - General tab.
·
Copy: Copies the currently selected media clip to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Library
folder.
·
Paste: Pastes the copied media clip to the selected Library folder.
·
Delete: Removes the currently selected clip from the selected Track/Library folder.

Clip menu
·
Mute: Silences the audio of a video clip. This option is helpful if you want to apply a different music
background to a specific video clip.
·
Fade-in: Gradually increases the volume of a clip from zero to full volume.
·
Fade-out: Gradually decreases the volume of a clip from full volume to zero.
· Cut Clip: Cuts a video or audio clip in two. With a clip selected, move the
Jog Slider under the Preview Window to select the point where you want to cut the clip.
· Split Audio:
Splits the audio and video of the selected clip into two separate entities.
· Playback Speed:
Adjusts the selected clip's playback speed.
· Multi-trim Video: Opens the
Multi-trim Video dialog box where you can select useful segments from a video clip and break down the
clip into these segments.
· Split by Scene: Opens the
Scenes dialog box where you can split the video file based on frame content or shooting date. This option
can also be used for clips in the Library.
· Change Image/Color Duration: Opens the
Duration dialog box where you can change the length of a clip.
· Auto Pan & Zoom:
Applies the Auto Pan & Zoom feature to the selected video clip.
·
Save Trimmed Video: Cuts the selected part according to the Trim Handles and saves it as a new video
file. After trimming to a video file, a thumbnail of this new video appears in the Library.
·
Save as Still Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as a new image file. A thumbnail of
this new image appears in the Library.
·
Export: Provides a number of ways to export and share your movie.
·
DV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an output
device such as a DV camcorder or other DV recording device.
·
HDV Recording: Opens a dialog box allowing you to directly send and record video data to an HDV
camcorder.
·
Web Page: Allows you to put a selected clip or movie file on a Web page.

Page 561

·
E-mail: Runs the user's default e-mail client (e.g. Outlook Express) and attaches the selected video clip or
movie file.
·
Greeting Card: Opens a dialog box allowing you to create a multimedia greeting card using a selected clip
or movie file.
·
Movie Screen Saver: Saves the selected clip as your desktop screen saver. You can only export WMV
files as screen savers.
·
Properties: Displays information about the currently selected clip.

Tools menu
· VideoStudio DV-to-DVD Wizard:
Opens the DV to DVD Wizard that allows you to capture videos from a DV camcorder then burn them
onto a video disc.
·
VideoStudio Movie Wizard: Opens the Movie Wizard that allows you to quickly create a movie.
·
Create Disc: Allows you to output your project (together with other VideoStudio projects or videos) to
create AVCHD, BDMV, DVD, VCD and SVCD.
·
Painting Creator: Opens the Painting Creator module dialog box.
· Select Device Control: Opens a dialog box where you can set up device control. This will allow you to
control your DV device using the
Navigation Panel.
· Change Capture Plug-in: Displays the
Change Capture Plug-in dialog box that allows you to choose a plug-in for the capture driver.
· Batch Convert: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can choose multiple video files in different file formats and convert
them to a single video file format.
·
Recover DVB-T Video: Retrieves lost data from captured videos.
·
Full Screen Preview: Gives an actual size preview of your project using the entire screen of a PC or TV
monitor. This is only available in the Capture and Share steps.
·
Save Current Frame as Image: Saves the current frame in the Preview Window as an image file in the
Library.
·
Print Options: Opens a dialog box where you can specify settings for printing still images.
·
Smart Proxy File Manager: Creates working copies of your HD videos with lower resolution.
·
Smart Proxy Queue Manager: Shows the files in queue for the creation of working copies in Smart Proxy
Manager.
· Make Movie Templates Manager: Create and manage templates that contain all the information (file
format, frame rate, compression, etc.) required to create a video file from your project. After you have
created a template, when you click Create Video File in the Share
Step, you will be given the option to use that template.

Page 562

· Preview Files Manager: Opens the
Preview Files Manager dialog box, listing all the preview files created in the project. You can select the
preview files to delete, freeing some of your system resources.
·
Library Organizer: Allows you to create custom media folders and backup/restore virtual media files in
the Library.
·
Chapter Point Manager: Sets chapter points in your movie.
·
Cue Point Manager: Sets cue points in your movie.
·
Track Manager: Allows you to show / hide tracks of your movie.

Help menu
·
Corel VideoStudio Help: Displays general program help about Corel VideoStudio.
·
Online Registration: This opens your browser to the Corel VideoStudio Online Registration page. This
allows you to instantly register your product and entitles you to full technical support, upgrade prices,
special offers on other Corel products, and occasionally free downloads.
·
Product Updates on the Web: Automatically opens your Web browser and leads you to Corel's Web
site for online registration, easy updates, special offers, and a plethora of tips, tricks, and ideas.
·
About Corel VideoStudio: Shows program version and copyright information.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 563

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 564

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 565

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 566

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 567

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 568

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 569

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 570

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 571

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 572

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 573

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 574

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 575

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 576

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 577

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 578

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 579

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 580

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 581

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 582

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 583

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 584

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 585

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 586

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 587

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 588

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 589

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 590

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 591

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 592

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 593

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 594

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 595

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 596

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 597

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 598

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 599

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 600

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 601

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 602

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 603

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 604

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 605

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 606

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 607

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 608

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 609

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 610

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 611

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 612

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 613

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 614

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 615

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 616

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 617

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 618

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 619

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 620

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 621

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 622

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 623

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 624

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 625

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 626

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 627

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 628

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 629

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 630

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 631

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 632

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 633

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 634

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 635

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 636

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 637

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 638

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 639

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 640

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 641

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 642

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 643

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 644

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 645

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 646

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 647

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 648

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 649

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 650

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 651

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 652

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 653

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 654

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 655

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 656

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 657

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 658

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 659

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 660

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 661

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 662

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 663

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 664

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 665

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 666

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 667

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 668

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 669

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 670

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 671

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 672

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 673

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 674

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 675

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 676

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 677

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 678

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 679

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 680

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 681

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 682

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 683

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 684

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 685

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 686

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 687

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 688

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 689

Appendix A: Menus and dialog boxes > Dialog boxes > Select Device C ontrol

Dialog boxes
Advanced Settings (DV-to-DVD Wizard)
·
Disc format: Displays the format of the currently inserted disc.
·
Delete temp files after burning: Select to delete the temporary files in the working folder after burning.
·
Working folder: Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
·
Auto add chapter: Select to automatically add chapters based on a specified time, recording date or
scenes.
·
Create DVD folders: Select to retain the DVD folder in your hard drive after burning. This option is only
available if the project is in DVD format. This also allows you to view the finished DVD title on the
computer using a DVD player.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed. Thus, avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Template music volume: Drag the slider to specify the volume level to use for the background music of
DVD menus.
·
Drive: Select a disc burner drive.
·
Burning speed: Select the rate on which to burn the disc.

Audio Save Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
Entire project: Creates an audio file containing the whole project.
·
Preview range: Creates an audio file containing only the range you have marked on the Timeline.
·

Page 690

Play after creating it: Select to play the audio file after the file has been created.
Compression tab
· Format: Click to open the
Audio Format dialog box where you can change the audio characteristics.
·
Attributes: Select from the drop-down list of audio characteristics to use for saving.

Batch Convert
·
Batch Convert List: Displays the video files to be converted. The size, type, date modified and path of
the video files are also displayed.
· Add: Opens the
Batch Convert dialog box where you can select the files you want to convert.
·
Remove: Deletes the selected file from the Batch Convert List.
·
Remove All: Deletes all the files in the Batch Convert List.
· Save in folder: Click
Browse to select a folder where to save the converted video files.
·
Save as type: Select to what file format to convert the video files.
·
Convert: Starts the conversion process.
·
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without converting the video files.
· Options: Opens the
Video Save Options dialog box where you can define save and compression settings for the selected file
format.

Border/Shadow/Transparency
Border tab
· Transparent text:
Select to create a transparent effect for your text.
· Outer stroke border:
Select to create an outer stroke border for your text.
·
Border width: Specify the thickness of the border.
·
Line color: Click to select a color for the border.
·
Text transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value, the more transparent the text
becomes.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value, the more the
border blends with the background.
Shadow tab
·
Shadow type: Select the type of shadow to apply to your text.
·
Intensity: Set intensity of glow shadow.

Page 691

·
Color: Click to select the color of the shadow.
·
Transparency: Set the transparency of the text. The higher the value the more transparent the shadow.
·
Soft edge: Make the border blend smoothly with the background. The higher the value the more the
shadow blends with the background.

Capture Options
·
Capture audio: Captures audio when capturing from an analog device.
·
Capture to Library: Puts the captured video into the Library.
·
Force to use preview mode: Improves captured video quality when capturing in SVCD or DVD format.
This is only available if your analog capture card supports this feature.
·
Capture frame rate: Select what frame rate to use when capturing the video. The higher the frame rate,
the smoother the video will be.

Change Capture Plug-in
·
Current capture plug-in: Allows you to choose a capture plug-in for the driver that comes with the
capture device installed on your computer. Capture plug-ins are programs that come with Corel
VideoStudio. They allow VideoStudio to communicate with your video camera.
·
Description: Displays a brief description of the selected capture plug-in.

Burning Options
· Disc burner:
Specifies the settings for your burning device.
·
Drive: Sets the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
·
Speed: Ses the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
·
Files to include on disc: Allows you to include other files on the disc aside from your video project.
·
Copyright information: Includes the Corel VideoStudio copyright text.
·
Project File: Includes the VideoStudio project file used to make the video.
·
Personal folder: Includes any other folders on the disc.
·
Advanced settings: Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
·
Test before recording: Checks (it does not actually burn yet) the CD/DVD burning capability of the drive
and disc. This will help you check if the system speed is enough to send data to the CD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual burning then starts. Clear to
burn the disc without performing a test.

Page 692

·
Buffer underrun protection: Select to use this technology when burning your video file. This technology
helps eliminate the buffer underrun problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner
you use.
·
Restart DVD+RW background format: Formats the DVD+RW before recording. Enabling this option
will prolong the recording process but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
Note: By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

Preferences: File menu
General tab
· Undo: Allows you to define the maximum number of times you can take back an action. Values range
from
1-99.
·
Relink checking: Automatically performs a crosscheck between the clips in the project and their
associated source files, allowing you to relink the source files to the clips. This is important when the file
in the Library is moved to another folder location.
·
Show startup screen: Select to open the startup screen every time you launch VideoStudio. This startup
screen allows you to choose either to open DV-to-DVD Wizard, VideoStudio Movie Wizard, or
VideoStudio Editor.
·
Show MPEG Optimizer dialog box: Displays the optimal segment settings of a project to be rendered.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save your finished projects and captured
clips.
· Clip display mode: Determines the manner to which your video clip will be presented on the Timeline.
Select Thumbnail only if you want your clip to be represented by a corresponding thumbnail on the
Timeline. Select File name only if you want your clip to be represented by its file name on the Timeline.
Or you can select
Thumbnail and file name to have your clip represented by its corresponding thumbnail and file name.
·
Media Library Animation: Select to enable animation of media in library.
·
Show message when inserting first video clip into Timeline: Enables VideoStudio to prompt a message
when it detects that an inserted video clip's properties do not match with the current project settings.
Note: When you capture or insert your first video clip into the project, VideoStudio automatically checks
the properties of the clip and your project. If properties such as file format, frame size, etc. are not
identical, VideoStudio displays a message and gives you the option to have the project settings
automatically adjusted to match the clip's properties. Changing the project settings allows VideoStudio to
perform SmartRender.
· Automatically save project every:
Select and specify the time interval when VideoStudio automatically saves a currently active project.
· Playback method: Allows you to choose a method for previewing your projects. Instant Playback
allows you to quickly preview changes in your project without the need to create a temporary preview
file, however, playback may be jerky depending on your computer resources.
High Quality Playback renders your project as a temporary preview file then plays this preview file.
Playback is smoother in High Quality Playback mode, but rendering your project for the first time in this

Page 693

mode may take a long time to complete depending on the size of your project and computer resources.
· In High Quality Playback mode, VideoStudio uses SmartRender
technology which renders only the changes you made such as transitions, titles and effects, and eliminates
re-rendering the entire project. SmartRender saves time when generating previews.
·
Instant Playback target: Selects where you want to preview your project. If you have a dual head display
card, you can play back your project on both the Preview Window and an external display device.
·
Background color: Specifies the background color to use for clips.
·
Display title safe area on Preview Window: Select to show the title safe area in the Preview Window
when creating titles. The title safe area is a rectangular box on the Preview Window. Make sure that your
text is within the title safe area to ensure that your entire text is properly displayed on the TV screen.
·
Display DV timecode on Preview Window: Displays the timecode of a DV video on the Preview
Window when it is being played back. Your display card must be VMR (Video Mixing Renderer)
compatible for the DV timecode to be displayed properly.
·
Display track hint on Preview Window: Select to display track information of the different overlay tracks
when playback is stopped.
Edit tab
· Apply color filter:
Select to configure VideoStudio to confine its color palette to those visible in the NTSC or PAL filter
color space to make sure that all the colors are valid. Clear if for monitor display only.
· Resampling quality:
Specifies the quality of effects and clips during editing. It is recommended to use a lower resampling
quality like Good to yield the most efficient editing performance.
·
Use Fit-to-Screen as default size in Overlay Track: Select this option to set default size to Fit-to-Screen
for clips in Overlay Track.
·
Default inserted image/color clip duration: Specifies the default clip length for all image clips and colors
that will be added in your video project. Unit of time for the duration is in seconds.
· Image resampling option:
Select a method for your image resampling.
·
Apply anti-flickering filter in image clips: Reduces the flickering that happens when using a television to
view image clips.
·
Cache image clips in memory: Allows you to use the cache in handling large image files for a more
efficient editing.
· Default audio fade-in/out duration:
Specifies the default duration for fading in and fading out of a video clip's audio. Value entered here will
be the amount of time it will take for the volume to reach the normal level for fading in or the base for
fading out.
· Enable audio while scrubbing:
Enables audio to be previewed while scrubbing on the timeline.
·
Apply audio cross-fade automatically: Allows you to automatically apply a cross-fade audio transition
with two overlapping audio.
·

Page 694

Default transition effect duration: Specifies duration of the transition effect applied to all clips in your
video project, in seconds.
· Automatically add transition effect:
Select to apply your chosen transition effect when video and image clips overlap each other.
·
Default transition effect: Allows you to choose the default transition effect to be applied to your project.
Capture tab
· Press OK to capture: Allows you to press
OK to start capturing.
·
Record directly from CD: Allows you to record an audio track directly from a CD.
·
Captured still image save format: Specifies the format to which your captured still image file will be saved
as.
·
Image quality: Determines the display quality of the captured image. The higher the quality, the bigger the
file.
·
Image capture deinterlace: Enables constant image resolution when downloading files, as opposed to the
progressive image resolution available with interlaced images.
·
Stop DV tape when capturing stops: Enables the DV camcorder to automatically stop the tape playback
after a video capture process is complete.
· Show drop frame information:
Select to display how many frames were dropped during video capture.
·
Show Recover DVB-T Video warning before capturing: Select to show warning to recover DVB-T
Video for a smooth capture.
Preview tab
·
Specify additional folders for preview files: Indicates which folder Corel VideoStudio can use to save
preview files. The folder shown is the folder specified in the SET TEMP statement of your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a partitioned drive. If you
only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.
·
Limit hard disk usage to: Specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for the Corel
VideoStudio's program. If you are only using Corel VideoStudio and want to optimize the performance,
select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs in the background, you may want
to limit this to half of the maximum file size. If left cleared, Corel VideoStudio uses your systems memory
management to control the use and distribution of memory.
Smart Proxy
·
Enable Smart Proxy: Automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is inserted into the
Timeline.
·
Create proxy when video size is (or above): Allows you to set the condition as to when proxy files will be
generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same or is higher than the chosen frame size here,
a proxy file will be created for the video file.
·
Proxy folder: Sets the folder location to store proxy files.
·

Page 695

Auto generate proxy template: Automatically generates proxy files with predefined settings.
· Video proxy options: Indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To change the proxy file
format or other settings, click Template to choose a template that already contains predefined settings, or
click
Options to tweak detailed settings.
UI Layout
· Allows you to change the layout of Corel VideoStudio's user interface through four preset options.

Preferences (Create Disc)
General tab
·
VCD player compliant: Corel VideoStudio uses the VCD 2.0 format when creating VCDs. For
navigation menus with background music, Corel VideoStudio uses a format that requires
"variable-bit-rate (VBR)" decoding. However, some VCD players do not support VBR decoding and
therefore VCDs created in Corel VideoStudio will not play correctly in these players. Select this option
to make sure that the VCD created will play in these players.
·
Anti-flicker filter: Select to apply the anti-flickering filter to the menu pages. The anti-flickering filter
reduces the "flickering" that happens when using a television (interlaced display) to view the menu pages.
However, this does not help when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors.
· Resume all confirmation dialog boxes:
Select to have the confirmation boxes appear even after the "Do not show again" option is selected.
·
TV system: Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL).
·
Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder: Select to set the maximum file size for DVD menus
to 30MB to make the DVD compatible with set-top DVD (DVD-VR) recorders.
·
Working folder: Allows you to select the folder you want to save to your finished projects and captured
clips.
Advanced tab
·
Create index file for MPEG seeking performance: Improves real-time preview result using the Jog Slider.
This option is specific for MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files only.
·
NTSC/PAL safe color: Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display quality of your menus when
viewed on any TV system. This helps you avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on
screen.
·
TV safe area: Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the Preview Window of the Setup Menu
page. If you set the TV safe area at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that
all your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be properly viewed on screen.

Project Properties
·
Project file information: Displays various information about the project file such as file size and duration.
·
Project template properties: Displays the video file format and other attributes used by the project.
· Edit file format: Select the video format you are going to use to create your final movie. Click Edit to

Page 696

open the
Project Options dialog box where you can customize compression and audio settings for the selected file
format.

Project Options
Corel VideoStudio tab
·
TV Standard: Select the TV Standard supported in your location.
·
Perform non-square pixel rendering: Select to perform non-square pixel rendering when previewing your
video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the real resolution of DV and
MPEG-2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the aspect ratio of computer monitors while the
non-square pixel is best used for viewing on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium
will be your primary mode of display.
·
Audio Channels: Choose from Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound.
General tab
·
Data track: Specify whether to create the video file or the video track only or include the audio track.
·
Frame rate: Specify the frame rate to use for the resulting video file.
·
Frame type: Select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video files. Field-based
video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.
·
Frame size: Select the size of the frame or define your own for the video file.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select from a list of supported pixel aspect ratios. By applying the correct aspect
ratio, images appear properly when previewed thus avoiding distorted motion and transparency on
images.
Compression tab
· Media Type:
Allows you to choose the compression format of your project.
· Video Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.
· Audio Settings:
Allows you to modify the video settings of your project.

Project Settings (Create Disc)
·
MPEG properties for file conversion: Displays detailed information about the selected video setting.
· Change MPEG Settings: Click to open a menu where you can select a disc template for the selected file
format. Click
Customize to define video save settings such as compression and frame rate.
·
Display aspect ratio: Select the output display of your project. VideoStudio supports standard 4:3 and
widescreen 16:9 display aspect ratios for videos and menus.
·
Do not convert compliant MPEG files: Select to not re-render MPEG files that are already compliant to

Page 697

the selected MPEG format.
·
Support X-Disc: Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD and XSVCD) compatible files to your
project.
·
Two-pass conversion: Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing the video data first before
encoding.
·
Auto fade out first play to menu: Select to automatically crossfade from the first play clip to the menu.
·
Play all clips first before menu: Select to play all videos first, and then display the menu.
·
Auto repeat when playback ends: Select to loop the video after it is done playing back.
· Clip playback: Select whether to play the next clip or go back to the menu after playback ends. This
option is disabled when
Auto repeat when playback ends is selected.

Preview Files Manager
Use the Preview Files Manager to free hard drive space occupied by temporary preview files used in
your project.
·
Preview files list: Displays VideoStudio project files (VSP) that you created and saved.
·
Delete: Click to remove the temporary files of the selected VideoStudio project file from your computer.
·
Delete All: Click to remove all the temporary files of all VideoStudio project files from your computer.
·
Hard disk: Displays the available free space of the selected hard drive.

Select Device Control
·
Current device: Select the appropriate capture driver from the drop-down list to be used by VideoStudio
in communicating with your device.
·
Timecode offset: Specify a value to adjust the discrepancy between the actual playing time of your device
and the trimming marks specified in the DV Recording dialog box. If for example you have specified the
mark in timecode for capturing and then after the process, the captured start frame is the frame before
the actual mark in timecode, you can then set a value of -4 to correct the timing between the device and
your capture board.
·
Description: Displays additional information about the current device control driver.
·
Options: Opens a dialog box related to the selected current device control driver. This button is disabled
if your current device does not support additional options. (Consult your hardware device's manual for
more information.)
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 698

Appendix B: Shortcuts

Appendix B: Shortcuts
Menu command shortcuts
Step Panel shortcuts
Navigation Panel shortcuts
Timeline shortcuts
Multi-trim Video shortcuts
Others
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 699

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Menu command shortcuts

Menu command shortcuts
Ctrl + N

Create a new project

Ctrl + O

Open a project

Ctrl + S

Save a project

Alt + Enter

Project Properties

F6

Preferences

Ctrl + Z

Undo

Ctrl + Y

Redo

Ctrl + C

Copy

Ctrl + V

Paste

Del

Delete

F1

Help

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 700

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Step Panel shortcuts

Step Panel shortcuts
Alt + C

Go to Capture Step

Alt + E

Go to Edit Step

Alt + F

Go to Effect Step

Alt + O

Go to Overlay Step

Alt + T

Go to Title Step

Alt + A

Go to Audio Step

Alt + S

Go to Share Step

Up

Go to the previous step

Down

Go to the next step

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 701

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Navigation Panel shortcuts

Navigation Panel shortcuts
F3

Set mark-in

F4

Set mark-out

Ctrl + 1

Switch to Project mode

Ctrl + 2

Switch to Clip mode

Ctrl + P

Play/Pause

Space

Play/Pause

Shift + Play button

Play the currently selected clip

Home

Home

Ctrl + H

Home

End

End

Ctrl + E

End

Ctrl + U

Previous frame

Ctrl + T

Next frame

Ctrl + R

Repeat

Ctrl + L

System Volume

Ctrl + I

Split Video

Tab

Toggle between the Trim Handles and Jog Slider.

Enter

When the left Trim Handle is active, pressing [Tab]
or [Enter] switches to the right handle.

Left

If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to make the Trim
Handles or Jog Slider active, use the Left-arrow
key to move to the previous frame.

Right

If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to make the Trim
Handles or Jog Slider active, use the Right-arrow
key to move to the next frame.

ESC

If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to activate and
toggle between the Trim Handles and Jog Slider,
you can press [Esc] to deactivate the Trim Handles
/Jog Slider.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 702

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Timeline shortcuts

Timeline shortcuts
Ctrl + A

Select all clips on the Timeline.
Single title: Select all characters in the on-screen
edit mode.

Ctrl + X

Single title: Cut selected characters in the on-screen
edit mode.

Shift + Click

Select multiple clips in the same track. (To select
multiple clips in the Library, Shift+Click or
Ctrl+Click the clips.)

Left

Select the previous clip on the Timeline.

Right

Select the next clip on the Timeline.

+/-

Zoom in/out.

Ctrl + Right

Scroll forward.

Ctrl + Left

Scroll backward.

Ctrl + Up /
Page Up

Scroll up.

Ctrl + Down /
Page Down

Scroll down.

Ctrl + Home

Move to the start of the Timeline.

Ctrl + End

Move to the end of the Timeline.

Ctrl + H

The previous segment.

Ctrl + E

The next segment.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 703

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Multi-trim Video shortcuts

Multi-trim Video shortcuts
Del

Delete

F3

Set mark-in

F4

Set mark-out

F5

Go backward in the clip

F6

Go forward in the clip

Esc

Cancel

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 704

Appendix B: Shortcuts > Others

Others
ESC

Stop capturing, recording, rendering, or close a
dialog box without making any changes.
If you switched to Full Screen Preview, press [Esc]
to change back to the VideoStudio Editor
interface.

Double-click a transition in the Effects
Library

Double-clicking a transition in the Library
automatically inserts it into the first empty transition
slot between two clips. Repeating this process will
insert a transition into the next empty transition
slot.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 705

Appendix C : Technology Overview

Appendix C: Technology
Overview
Analog vs. Digital
HD Technology
SmartRender Technology
DV SmartPlay
AVCHD, BD, HD DVD, DVD, VCD, SVCD
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 706

Appendix C : Technology Overview > Analog vs. Digital

Analog vs. Digital
With repeated use, the magnetic tape used in High-8, 8 mm, VHS, and S-VHS becomes prone to wear
and tear. It gets thinner and thinner until the video could no longer be played. On the other hand, the
quality of digital video doesn't diminish over time. You can play DVs countless times and still expect the
quality to be as sharp as it originally was. Digitization also extends a video's life span and allows you to
enhance its original sound and picture quality.
Digitizing analog videos is a breeze with VideoStudio, wherein data captured from an analog device are
automatically converted to digital format. Once digitized, you can edit these footage and output them in
any disc format of your choice.

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 707

Appendix C : Technology Overview > HD Technology

HD Technology
HDV users are by definition concerned with picture quality. VideoStudio allows you to work with high
definition videos just as you would with DV: batch capture, edit, apply filters and transitions, then output
to various formats such as SD, HD or WMV-HD for Web-sharing.
After you have connected an HDV camcorder and properly set up the device for capturing, VideoStudio
will automatically set the capture plug-in and device control to HDV Capture Plug-in and HDV 1394
Device Control respectively.
The HDV Capture Plug-in converts the source video from your HDV camcorder into an MPEG-2
Program Stream (PS) video file when capturing it into your computer. By converting the video, it allows
you to take advantage of VideoStudio's SmartRender technology when you edit the captured video clips.
This means that whenever you preview your edits or create a video file, only the clips which have been
altered will be rendered.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 708

Appendix C : Technology Overview > SmartRender Technology

SmartRender Technology
Speed is usually one of the primary concerns of users when editing videos. While working on a video
project, usually, you will want to preview the project as you edit, and it can be quite discouraging if you
have to wait a long time to see the results of your work.
Corel VideoStudio's SmartRender feature makes previewing and creating movies a lot faster. When you
preview your video project for the first time, VideoStudio 'renders' the project by creating a temporary
preview file on your hard drive which combines the video, image, and audio clips with the special effects
which you applied to them. The SmartRender feature detects any changes in your project and if there are
no changes, instantly plays back the preview file. If there are changes (for instance, when titles, video
filters or transition effects have been added), it renders out only the edited portions, making render times
much shorter and faster.
The SmartRender feature also skips re-rendering when the properties of the captured video are
consistent with the project settings. It only renders your project the first time you inserted your captured
video clips. When you add more captured video clips, VideoStudio directly plays back the project
without rendering.
In addition to previewing your video files, Corel VideoStudio gives you an option to instantly preview
your project without creating temporary files. With the Instant Playback option, you can play the entire
project without having to wait then preview it immediately.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 709

Appendix C : Technology Overview > DV SmartPlay

DV SmartPlay
Corel VideoStudio's DV SmartPlay feature plays a video project directly from the Timeline out to a
DV/D8 camcorder without rendering a movie file. It also lets you view your project on an external TV
monitor if your IEEE-1394 capture card supports such monitor connection. While you are viewing your
project on a DV/D8 camcorder, you can simultaneously record the project to the videotape by pressing
Record on your camcorder.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 710

Appendix C : Technology Overview > AVC HD, BD, DVD, VC D and SVC D

AVCHD, BD, DVD, VCD and SVCD
There are several factors to consider in choosing an output format for your project. These include your
desired output quality, target playback device, and viewing screen size, among others. Here are the
advantages and disadvantages that picking each output format entails:
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) A new digital video camera recording format that
records 1080i and 720p high definition quality and stores data in 8 cm recordable DVDs, flash memory
cards or hard disks.
BD (Blu-ray Disc) Developed by the Blu-ray disc Association, BD is an optical disc format that uses a
blue-violet laser, allowing data to be packed in 25 and 50 GB Blu-ray discs and play high definition
video.
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) is popular in video production because of its quality. Not only does it
guarantee superb audio and video quality, it can also hold several times more data than VCDs and
SVCDs. DVDs make use of the MPEG-2 format, which has a much bigger file size than MPEG-1, and
can likewise be produced as single or dual-sided, and single and dual-layered. They can be played on
stand-alone DVD players or on the DVD-ROM drive of your PC.
Video Compact Disc (VCD) is a special version of a CD-ROM that uses the MPEG-1 format. The
quality of the exported movie is almost the same, but usually better than VHS tape-based movies. A
VCD can be played back on a CD-ROM drive, VCD player, and even on a DVD player.
Super Video CD (SVCD) is commonly described as an enhanced version of VCD. It is based on
MPEG-2 technology with Variable Bit Rate (VBR) support. The typical running time of an SVCD is
about 30-45 minutes. Although you could extend this to 70 minutes, you will have to compromise sound
and image quality. SVCDs can be played back on stand-alone VCD/SVCD players, most DVD players,
and all CD-ROM/DVD-ROM with a DVD/SVCD player software.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 711

Appendix D: System tweaks > Enabling DMA for IDE disks

Appendix D: System tweaks
Enabling DMA for IDE disks
Direct Memory Access (DMA) is a method of transporting data from the system's main memory without
passing through the CPU. Open the Control Panel's System program, and in the Device Manager,
enable
DMA (Direct Memory Access) for all the hard disks (in the primary and secondary IDE channels) that
will be used for capturing video. DMA avoids possible drop frame problems when you are capturing
video.

Disabling Write-Behind Caching
Disable Write-Behind Caching
on the hard drive used for video capture.
In Windows XP:

Page 712

Setting the Paging File size
Change the values of your Paging File (Swap File) size. Set the minimum and maximum to twice your
amount of RAM. For instance, if you have 256MB of RAM, set both your minimum and maximum
paging file limits to 512MB.
In Windows XP:

Page 713

_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 714

Appendix E: Tips and techniques

Appendix E: Tips and
techniques
A. DV camcorder tips
B. Web video tips
C. Troubleshooting tips
A. DV camcorder tips
· Format the DV tape before shooting video.
Formatting a DV tape is desirable for batch capture and for accurately locating timecodes. Formatting
here means to record a blank video from start to end without interruption. This is what a professional
cameraman will do with a new DV tape. Once it is formatted, you can start shooting video. Thus, when
you play your video footage on the DV camcorder, the counter (displayed as Timecode on the
camcorder's LCD monitor or viewfinder) keeps running even when there's no actual video.
· How to get the best video quality out of a DV camcorder.
Capturing video using the IEEE-1394 interface card provides loss-proof quality. After editing your
project, you can then render your final movie at any file format of your choice.
If you don't have an IEEE-1394 card or a DV camcorder, the second choice is to use an analog capture
card. If you intend to record your finished project back to the videotape, using an analog capture card
with S-video output yields better video quality.
B. Web video tips
· Use a smaller frame size for movie files intended for the Web.
A one-minute video clip, which is captured in its native DV AVI format from a DV camcorder, takes
about 200MB of disk space. If you have such a large-size captured clip inserted in your project, it will
also take much time to render the project into a movie file. For files that you intend to send over the
Internet, it's better to use a smaller frame size (for example, 352 x 240) when rendering.
· About Windows Media Video (*.WMV) and RealVideo (*.RM) files
Corel VideoStudio lets you create movies in file formats such as Windows Media Video (*.WMV) and
RealNetworks RealVideo (*.RM) formats for streaming over the Internet and for playback on
computers. Windows Media Video files can be directly inserted into a VideoStudio project and edited.
C. Troubleshooting tips
· Power on the camcorder to reestablish connection.
Camcorders may automatically shut down to save power, as such, losing the connection between the
camcorder and Corel VideoStudio is common. When this happens, users need to turn on the camcorder
to reestablish connection. There is no need to close and reopen VideoStudio, since the program can
automatically detect capture devices.
· When VideoStudio cannot accurately locate timecodes...
When capturing video or positioning the tape at a particular timecode, sometimes VideoStudio may not
be able to locate the timecode accurately and may even halt the program itself. When this happens, you

Page 715

may need to shut down the program. Another option is to turn off your camcorder, then wait for a few
seconds (at least six seconds) before turning it back on. This resets VideoStudio, and once again, allows
the program to properly detect capture devices.
· If VideoStudio cannot control the DV camcorder...
If VideoStudio cannot control your DV camcorder and locate specific timecodes accurately, select
Tools: Select Device Control and click the
Options button. A Device Control Options dialog box then appears. Here, you can fine-tune the control
settings so that your camcorder and VideoStudio can work together more closely in the way that you
like.
Note: Failure to locate the correct timecode may lead to unexpected problems (such as noise or delays)
during capturing or recording back to the DV camcorder.
· If VideoStudio does not work properly...
Repair VideoStudio if it does not work properly. To repair VideoStudio, double-click Add or Remove
Programs in the Control Panel. Select Corel VideoStudio, click Change/Remove, then click
Repair.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 716

Glossary

Glossary
Analog
A signal that is not digital. Most VCRs, radio/television broadcasting, AV in/out, S-VIDEO, and stereos
are analog. Computers are digital, dealing in ones and zeros. Information from an analog source must be
digitized to be used on a computer.
Aspect Ratio
The relationship of width to height for a given image or graphic. Keeping or maintaining the aspect ratio
refers to the process of maintaining size relationships when either the width or height of an image or
graphic is changed.
AVI
Audio-Video Interleave is a digital video file format designed specifically for the Microsoft Windows
environment.
BD
Blu-ray Disc is an optical disc format that uses a blue-violet laser, allowing data to be packed in 25 and
50 GB Blu-ray discs and play high definition video.
Capture
The recording of video or images to a computer hard disk.
Capture Plug-ins
These are utilities integrated with Corel VideoStudio that allow the program to recognize capture devices
and automatically detect them when they are connected to the computer.
Clip
A short section or part of a movie. A clip can be audio, video, still images or a title.
Codec
COmpress and DECompress. All videos on a computer uses a special algorithm or program to process
video. This program is called a codec.
Color Clip
A simple background color used in a movie. It is often used for titles and credits since they stand out
clearly against the solid color.
Composite Video
A video signal that combines luminance and chrominance. NTSC and PAL are examples of composite
video.
Compression
Making a file smaller by removing redundant data. Nearly all digital video is compressed in some way or
another. Compression is achieved through a codec.
Data Rate
The amount of data per second that is transferred from one part of your computer to another. In digital
video, the data rate of your source is very important: CD-ROMs have lower data rates than hard disks.
The data rate of the Internet is very low.
Device Control
A software driver that allows programs to control video sources like the camcorder or VCR.
Digital

Page 717

Computer data consisting of ones and zeros. Contrast digital information with analog.
Digitizing
The process of converting analog input to a digital form so that it can be used by the computer.
DNLE
Digital Non-Linear Editing is a method of combining and editing multiple video clips to produce a finished
product. DNLE offers random access to all source materials and all portions on the master tape at all
times during the editing process.
Driver
A software program that controls the connection between a specific device and a computer.
DV
Digital Video with a capital "D" and a capital "V" stands for a very specific format of video, just like VHS
or High-8. This format can be understood (played back, recorded) by your camcorder and also by your
computer, if you have the proper hardware (capture card) and software (DV codec). The most exciting
thing about DV is that it can be copied from your camcorder to your computer, and then back to your
camcorder (after editing, of course) without any loss of quality.
DVD
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
is popular in video production because of its quality. Not only does it guarantee superb audio and video
quality, it can also hold several times more data than VCDs and SVCDs. DVDs make use of the
MPEG-2 format, which has a much bigger file size than MPEG-1, and can likewise be produced as
single or dual-sided, and single and dual-layered. They can be played on stand-alone DVD players or on
the DVD-ROM drive of your PC.
Effect
In VideoStudio, an effect is a special computer generated transition between two video clips.
Export
The process of sharing files between applications. When you export a file, the data is usually converted
into a format that is recognizable by the receiving application. The original file remains unchanged.
Fade
A transition effect where the clip gradually disappears or appears. In video, the picture would gradually
change to or from a solid color; for audio, the transition would be from full volume to complete silence or
vice-versa.
FireWire
A standard interface used for connecting digital audio/video devices such as DV camcorders to
computers. It is the trademarked name given by Apple Computers for the IEEE-1394 standard.
Footage
A length of recorded film intended for use in a larger project.
Frame
A single image in a movie.
Frame Rate
The number of frames per second in a video. NTSC video is commonly 29.97 frames per second (fps),
but smaller video files can be created on the computer by using lower frame rates, like 15 fps (not
suitable for VCD or DVD).
Frame Size
The size of displayed images in video or animation sequences. If an image intended for the sequence is
larger or smaller than the current frame size, it must be resized or cropped.
HDV
Abbreviation for High Definition Video. It is the video recording format that allows for high data
compression, and in turn allows for higher picture resolutions. HDV can go up to 1920 x 1080 in
resolution.
HiColor
A 16-bit image data type that can contain up to 65,536 colors. The TGA file format supports images of

Page 718

this type. Other file formats require prior conversion of a HiColor image into True Color. For displays,
HiColor normally refers to 15-bit (5-5-5) display adapters that can display up to 32,768 colors.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is a non-profit organization that sets and reviews
standards for the electronics industry.
IEEE-1394
A standard that allows high-speed serial connections between the computer and a DV camcorder, VCR
or any kind of digital audio/video device. Devices conforming to this standard are capable of transmitting
digital data at 100 megabits per second (at the least).
Instant Playback
Allows you to view the entire project without rendering. It instantly plays all the clips in the Preview
Window without creating a temporary preview file in your system. However, if played in a slower
computer, it may drop some frames. If the project is composed of many effects, filters, titles, etc., and
you're playing it in a slow PC, then drop frames may occur.
If Instant Playback results in drop frames, then use
High Quality Playback to preview a project.
Key frame
A specific frame in a clip that is flagged for special editing or other activities in order to control the flow,
playback or other characteristics of the completed animation. For example, when applying a video filter,
assigning different effect levels on the beginning and end frames shows a change in the appearance of the
video from start to end of the video clip. When creating a video, assigning key frames on parts where
there are high data transfer requirements helps control how smoothly the video plays back.
Library (Corel VideoStudio)
The Library is the repository for all of your media clips. You can store video, audio, titles, or color clips
in the Library and instantly retrieve them for use in a project.
Linear Editing
Traditional editing done on a flatbed where the source film is fed in one side, marked, cut, and spliced,
and then fed out the other end. It's called linear because tape must be edited in the order it's presented
(as opposed to non-linear editing).
Link
A method of storing previously saved information in another program without significantly affecting the
size of the resulting file. Linking offers another advantage in that the original file can be modified in its
original program and the changes will automatically be reflected in the program where it is linked.
Mark In/Out
Points in a clip that have been marked for editing and trimming purposes. A section can be selected from
a longer clip by setting its beginning (Mark in) and ending (Mark out).
MP3
Abbreviation of MPEG Audio Layer-3. MP3 is an audio compression technology that produces near
CD audio quality at a very small file size, making it transfer quickly over the Internet.
MPEG-1
A standard for video and audio compression used in many products like VCD. For NTSC, its video
resolution is 352x240 pixels at 29.97 fps. For PAL, it works at 352x288 pixels at 25 fps.
MPEG-2
A subset of MPEG-1. It's a standard for video and audio compression used in products like DVD. For
NTSC DVD, its video resolution is 720x480 pixels at 29.97 fps. For PAL DVD, it works at 720x576
pixels at 25 fps.
NLE
Non-Linear Editing. Conventional editing on a VCR is necessarily linear because you must access clips
on a video tape in order. Computer editing can be done in any order that is convenient.
Noise
Small audible or visual discrepancies that adversely affect audio and video files which have been

Page 719

recorded or captured incorrectly or with faulty equipment.
NTSC/PAL
NTSC is the video standard in North America, Japan, Taiwan, and some other regions. Its frame rate is
29.97 fps. PAL is common in Europe, Australia, New Zealand, China, Thailand, and some other Asian
places, which has a frame rate of 25 fps. There are other differences. In the world of DV and DVD,
NTSC has the video resolution of 720x480 pixels, while PAL has 720x576 pixels.
Overlay
These are the superimposed video or image clips over existing clips in your project.
Plug-ins
Plug-ins are utilities that add more functions and effects to a program. In Corel VideoStudio, plug-ins
have made it possible for the program to automatically recognize capture devices as well as output videos
for different purposes such as for e-mail, Web page, video greeting cards, and DV recording.
Profile
A Profile covers various attributes for a Windows Media Format file such as bit rate, number and type of
streams, compression quality, frame size and so on.
Project File
In VideoStudio, a project file (*.VSP) contains the required information to link all associated image,
audio, and video files. You need to open a project file first before starting video-editing in VideoStudio.
Render
Rendering is the process of making a finished movie from the source files in a project.
Scenes
A scene is a series of frames binded by continuity. In Corel VideoStudio, each scene that is captured
using the Split by Scene feature is based on the footage's recording date and time. In a captured DV AVI
file, scenes can be separated into several files based on the footage's recording date and time or by
changes in the content of the video. In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes are separated into files
based on content changes.
Seamless Capture
As a workaround to the 4 GB capture file size limitation in Windows systems that use the FAT 32 file
system (such as Windows 98 and Windows Me), Corel VideoStudio automatically saves captured video
as a new file when this limitation has been reached. This method, known as seamless capture, allows the
capturing process to be performed uninterrupted no matter how long the footage is. VideoStudio
performs seamless capture when capturing DV Type-1 or DV Type-2 (from DV camcorder), or when
capturing MPEG video (from DV camcorder or analog capture device).
Windows systems such as Windows 2000 and Windows XP that are installed using the NTFS file
system do not have the 4 GB limitation.
SmartRender
SmartRender technology renders only project changes, eliminating the need to re-render whole projects
and enabling fast previewing.
Split by scene
This feature automatically splits up different scenes into individual files. In Corel VideoStudio, the way
scenes are detected depends on which step you are in. In the Capture Step, Split by Scene detects
individual scenes based on the original footage's recording date and time. In the Edit Step, if Split by
Scene is applied to a DV AVI file, scenes can be detected in two ways: by the recording date and time,
or by the changes in the content of the video. Whereas in an MPEG file, scenes are detected only based
on the content changes.
Storyboard
A Storyboard is a visual representation of your movie. Individual clips are represented as image
thumbnails on the Timeline.
Streaming
This is a relatively new Internet technology that allows large files to be played as they are being
downloaded. Streaming is commonly used for large video and audio files.

Page 720

SVCD
Super Video CD (SVCD)
is commonly described as an enhanced version of VCD. It is based on MPEG-2 technology with
Variable Bit Rate (VBR) support. The typical running time of an SVCD is about 30-45 minutes.
Although you could extend this to 70 minutes, you will have to compromise sound and image quality.
SVCDs can be played back on stand-alone VCD/SVCD players, most DVD players, and all
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM with a DVD/SVCD player software.
Template
A work pattern in a software program. It includes predefined formats and settings to save user's efforts
and reduce risks of making mistakes.
Timecode
The timecode of a video file is a numerical way of representing the position in a video. Timecodes can be
used to make very accurate edits.
Timeline
The Timeline is a graphic representation of your movie in chronological order. The relative size of clips on
the Timeline gives you an accurate idea of the length of your media clips.
Title
A title can be a movie title, a caption or credit. Any text, image, or video file that overlays in your movie
can be referred to as titles.
Transition Effect
A transition is a method of sequencing between two video clips, like fading from one into another. In
Corel VideoStudio, there are a large variety of special transitions available, and they are called Effects.
Trim
The process of editing or cropping a movie clip. Computer video can be trimmed frame by frame.
VCD
Video Compact Disc (VCD)
is a special version of a CD-ROM that uses the MPEG-1 format. The quality of the exported movie is
almost the same, but usually better than VHS tape-based movies. A VCD can be played back on a
CD-ROM drive, VCD player, and even on a DVD player.
Video Filters
A video filter is a method of changing the appearance of a video clip, like mosaic and ripple.
Voiceover
The narration of a video or movie is commonly called the voiceover. This is most notable in
documentaries such as nature shows.
_______________________
Note: This online Help provides information on the features of different Corel VideoStudio editions. Some
features are not available in all editions. Visit www.corel.com for more information.

Page 721



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Modify, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 721
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Creator                         : 
Create Date                     : 2012:03:22 10:40:01
Producer                        : ProcessText Group
Author                          : 
Title                           : 
Subject                         : 
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu